ba8_m5us.book Seite 2 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
M5
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M5.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW M5's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW M5 throughout an extended ser-
vice life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 1 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
© 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 013 310
US English II/07, 07 03 510
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 2 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 234.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
23 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
41 Adjusting
52 Transporting children safely
55 Driving
65 Everything under control
77 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
91 Lamps
95 Climate
102 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
112 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
120 Starting navigation system
122 Destination entry
134 Destination guidance
143 What to do if …
Entertainment
146 On/off and tone
150 Radio
159 CD player and CD changer
165 AUX-In connection
166 USB/audio interface
Communications
172 Telephoning
187 BMW Assist
Mobility
196 Refueling
198 Wheels and tires
203 Under the hood
208 Maintenance
210 Replacing components
219 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
226 Technical data
229 Short commands of voice command
system
234 Everything from A to Z
ba8_m5us.book Seite 3 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech-
nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 4 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes all equipment and features offered
for the BMW M5.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor-
responding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 5 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Notes
6
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive dam-
age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter-
fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect
the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See
your BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 6 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport
Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
ba8_m5us.book Seite 7 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 8 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
ba8_m5us.book Seite 9 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Rear window safety switch 38
2 Sun blind
*
for rear window 103
3 Opening and closing windows 37
4 Adjusting exterior mirrors 48
Automatic curb monitor
*
48
5 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
*
48
7 Shift paddles 60
6
Turn signals 61
High beams, headlamp flasher 93
Roadside parking lamps 93
Check Control 70
Computer 66
ba8_m5us.book Seite 10 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8 Buttons on steering wheel
9 Instrument cluster 12
12 Ignition lock 55
13 Horn, entire surface
16 Releasing hood 203
17 Opening luggage compartment lid 33
Mobile phone
*
172:
> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing
*
for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
> Press and hold: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice
command system
*
23
Changing radio station 150
Selecting music track 160
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers
MDrive, call up individual
settings 50
Individually programmable 49
10
Windshield wipers 62
Rain sensor 62
11
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 55
14
Steering wheel heater
*
49
Steering wheel adjustment 49
15
Cruise control 63
18
Head-Up Display
*
88
19
Parking lamps 91
Low beams 91
Daytime running lamps
*
92
Automatic headlamp control 91
Daytime running lamps
*
92
Adaptive Head Light
*
93
20
Instrument lighting 94
ba8_m5us.book Seite 11 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 65
5 Engine oil thermometer 66
6 Display for
> Computer 66
Engine oil level 204
> Indicator and warning lamps 70
> Speed of cruise control 64
7 Display for
> Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
> Engine oil level for manual
transmission
*
204
> Check Control message present 70
> Odometer and trip odometer 65
> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 68
8 Fuel gauge 66
9 Resetting trip odometer 65
ba8_m5us.book Seite 12 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
Some lamps are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis-
played indicator and warning lamps.
Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a
malfunction and on the corresponding need to
take action can be displayed via the Check Con-
trol, refer to page 70.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps indicate that cer-
tain functions are activated or deactivated:
MDrive 51
Handbrake applied 57
Handbrake applied for Canadian
models
Parking lamps/low beams 91
M Dynamic Mode 79
High beams/headlamp flasher 93
Lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive and braking
forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 79
ba8_m5us.book Seite 13 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
ba8_m5us.book Seite 14 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for hands-free mode for
telephone
*
and for voice command system
*
23
2 Reading lamps 94
3 SOS: initiating
an emergency call 219
4 Glass sunroof
*
, electric 38
5 Interior lamps 94
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 87
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Central locking system 32
10 Automatic climate control 95
11 Changing
> radio station 146
> track 146
12 Ejecting
> navigation DVD
*
146
> audio CD 146
13 Drive for navigation system DVD with
Professional
*
navigation system 120
14 Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons 21
15 Drive for audio CDs 146
16 Switching Entertainment sound output
on/off and adjusting volume 146
18 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in four
directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Drivelogic of Sequential Manual
Transmission 60
21 EDC Electronic Damper Control for
Sequential Manual Transmission 81
22 DSC Dynamic Stability Control for
Sequential Manual Transmission 79
23 M Engine Dynamic Control POWER for
Sequential Manual Transmission 58
24 EDC Electronic Damper Control for manual
transmission
*
81
25 M Dynamic Mode MDM for manual
transmission 79
Temperature setting, left/right 96
Automatic air distribution and
volume 96
Cooling function 98
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 98
Recirculated-air mode 98
Maximum cooling 98
Air volume 97
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 97
Rear window defroster 95
17
Heated seats 46
Active seat ventilation
*
47
Adjusting active backrest
width
*
43
Flat Tire Monitor 81
PDC Park Distance Control
*
77
Opening tailgate
*
33
ba8_m5us.book Seite 15 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of the individual func-
tions is described in connection with the rele-
vant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening start menu
3 Controller
With the controller you can select menu
items and make settings:
> move in four directions, arrows 4
> turn, arrow 5
> press, arrow 6
To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehi-
cle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 16 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone
*
> BMW Assist
*
or TeleService
*
Navigation or onboard information
> Navigation system
*
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying
the average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
> AUX-In connection
> USB/audio interface
*
Climate
> Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Seat heater distribution
*
> Parked car operation
menu
> Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for MDrive, or
for the central locking system
> Display of maintenance intervals and dead-
lines for legally mandated inspections
> Settings for telephone
Operating principle
From radio readiness, refer to page 55, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 17 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Opening menu items of start menu
With the start menu you can open the menu
items Communication, Navigation, Entertain-
ment and Climate by moving the controller to
the left, right, front or rear.
You can open the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Comfort opening of menu items
Comfort opening offers you:
> Opening of a menu item of the start menu in
the last display shown
> Direct changing between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the button
For this purpose, move the controller in the cor-
responding direction and hold it for longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is divided into fields.
The respective active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility
of accessing other menu items that are not
currently visible.
3 Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
ba8_m5us.book Seite 18 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.
You can view the individual steps under Set-
tings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to
page 74.
1 Selecting menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight moves
> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by highlighting
2 Activating menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is carried out
3 Selecting menu item: refer to 1
4 Changing between fields:
> Briefly move the controller left, right,
forward or back
> Release controller
> Active field appears lighter
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field
ba8_m5us.book Seite 19 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone
*
in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*
:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist
2 Entertainment sound output off
3 Station that transmits traffic information is
received
*
:
"TI":
Reception of traffic information for the nav-
igation system
is possible and activated
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
5 Telephoning
*
is possible if the mobile
phone is paired in the vehicle
Mobile phone network with strong
reception, dependent on mobile phone
6 Time
Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
inputs via the voice command system
*
.
Assistance window*
Additional information appears in the assis-
tance window:
> The computer or the trip computer
> The arrow or map view with a navigation
system
*
> The current position
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 20 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching assistance window off/on
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
To switch on, change to the assistance window
and press the controller.
Switching Control Display
off/on
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
To switch on, press the controller.
Programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
You can save and run certain functions of iDrive
on the programmable memory/direct selection
buttons:
> Destinations of navigation
> Telephone, phone numbers
> Entertainment:
> radio station
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer
*
> AUX
The assignment of the programmable memory/
direct selection buttons is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Saving function
Destinations of navigation
1. Select navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or the address book.
2. Press the ... button longer
than 2 seconds.
Special features:
> With the destination guidance system and
the map view started, the current destina-
tion is stored.
> During destination entry via a map, the
coordinates at the cursor are stored, not the
current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
1. Enter the phone number or select it in a list
of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the
A-Z list.
2. Press the ... button longer
than 2 seconds.
If a name is assigned to the phone number, the
name will also be stored.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 21 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
iDrive
22
Entertainment
In the Entertainment menu, the sound source
currently heard, e.g. a radio station, is stored,
regardless of the selection on the Control Dis-
play.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
tion or CD.
2. Press the ... button longer
than 2 seconds.
If the vehicle is equipped with two drives,
the current track is stored for CDs with
compressed audio files.<
Run function
Press the ... button.
When selecting a phone number, the connec-
tion is also established, or the destination guid-
ance is started when a navigation destination is
selected.
Displaying button assignment
You can display the assignment of the buttons
by touching them with your finger. Please do
not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with
an object, e.g. a pen, does not function.
Displaying short info
Touch the ... button.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed.
Destination of navigation system
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
Touch the ... button longer.
Deleting button assignments
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory
keys" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 22 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the
voice command system in order to enable iden-
tification of the spoken commands. To set the
language of iDrive, refer to page 76.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
command system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can input additional commands.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice
command system.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 23 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Voice command system
24
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible com-
mands:
For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer
*
.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can run certain func-
tions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected, refer to page 229.
Opening start menu
Example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Cancel}
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD on}}
6. Select track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 24 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Notes
The mobile phone can also be operated
with voice commands, refer to
page 183.<
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
> Always issue commands in the language of
the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun-
roof
*
closed to prevent interference from
ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 25 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 26 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
ba8_m5us.book Seite 27 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
1 Remote control with integrated key
2 Spare key
3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-
ment
Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access
*
, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 37.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 29.
Information on the required for maintenance is
also stored in the remote control, refer to Ser-
vice data in remote control, page 208.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 103
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.
Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key fit the same
locks.
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 28 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> When unlocking with the remote control,
either unlock only the driver's door or the
entire vehicle, refer to page 30
> Locking the vehicle after a short time or
after starting off, refer to page 32
> Programming button on steering wheel,
refer to page 49
> Individual settings for MDrive, refer to
page 50
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis-
play:
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 75
> Measuring units for consumption, route/
distances, temperature, and pressure,
refer to page 75
> Language on Control Display, refer to
page 76
> 12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to
page 74
> Date format, refer to page 75
> Lighting settings:
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 92
> Daytime running lamps
*
, refer to
page 92
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 62
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 91
> Drivelogic driving program in the Sequential
mode, refer to page 60
> Showing optical warning for PDC Park Dis-
tance Control
*
, refer to page 78
> Selection and brightness of display in
Head-Up Display
*
, refer to page 88
> Air distribution, temperature in the upper
body area and intensity of the automatic cli-
mate control, refer to page 96
> Setting voice instructions for destination
guidance in the navigation system
*
, refer to
Starting navigation system, page 120
In addition, the following, most recently
selected settings are recalled during unlocking:
> Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,
and steering wheel
*
, refer to page 43
> Audio sources, volume and tone settings,
refer to page 147
> Radio:
> Display of stored stations, refer to
page 150
> Switching RDS Radio Data System on/
off
*
, refer to page 153
ba8_m5us.book Seite 29 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
> Telephone, setting volume, refer to
pages 178, 184
> With programmable memory/direct selec-
tion buttons, selection of stored functions,
refer to page 21
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for opera-
tion whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access
*
via the door handles
At the same time, the anti-theft system is also
operated. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. In addition, it the remote control is used,
the welcome lamps, the interior lamps and the
courtesy lamps
*
are switched on or off. The
alarm system
is armed/disarmed at the same
time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system
on page 35.
Operating from inside
Via the button for central locking, refer to
page 32. The fuel filler door is not locked.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: from
outside
Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
*
of the
doors and the welcome lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The
setting is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 30 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
Comfort opening
Press the button longer. The windows and
the glass sunroof
*
open.
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan-
ger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off alarm: press any button.
Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-
less of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
During opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
that adequate clearance is available before
opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the cargo bay.
A previously locked luggage compartment lid is
also locked again after closing.<
Setting confirmation signals
You can vary or also deactivate the confirmation
signals for locking or unlocking.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
Malfunction
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
ba8_m5us.book Seite 31 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the luggage compart-
ment lid.
Comfort operation
You also have the option of operating the win-
dows and the glass sunroof
*
from the driver's
door lock.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Releasing the
key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from
inside
When the front doors are closed, this button
unlocks or locks the doors and luggage com-
partment lid, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 32 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
start to drive.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely press them closed
gently. The closing process will then be carried
out automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
Luggage compartment lid
During opening, the luggage compartment lid
pivots back and up. Make sure that adequate
clearance is available before opening.<
Opening from inside
Press button 1 or button 2
*
: the luggage com-
partment lid opens.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 33 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Opening from outside
Press the button on the luggage compartment
lid or the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Manual release
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the luggage compartment lid manu-
ally.
1. Grasp the rear seat 1 at the front edge and
remove from the mounts 2. Take out the
rear seat.
2. Pull the ring. The luggage compartment lid
is unlocked and opens.
Only grasp the emergency release by
the ring, otherwise injuries can
occur.<
Reinstalling rear seat:
1. Position the rear seat in the vehicle. Guide
the two outer belt buckles 3 through the
seat bench and slide the seat bench com-
pletely under the backrest. The center belt
ba8_m5us.book Seite 34 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
buckle 4 must be guided between the seat
bench and the backrest when doing so.
Do not twist the center belt buckle,
otherwise correct operation of this
safety equipment is not ensured.<
2. Press the rear seat downward into the
mounts at the front until it audibly engages.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood, or the luggage com-
partment lid are opened
> To movements in the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 35
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> with an acoustic alarm
> by switching on
the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
The luggage compartment lid can also be
opened with the system armed with the but-
ton on the remote control, refer to page 33.
When the luggage compartment lid is closed, it
is locked and monitored again.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to mon-
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. However, the interior motion
sensor is not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof
*
must be completely closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In two-level garages
ba8_m5us.book Seite 35 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort access*
Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing
> Opening luggage compartment lid sepa-
rately
> Starting engine
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked if the vehicle detects that
the remote control you are carrying is out-
side the vehicle.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 28
beforehand.
The special features when using comfort
access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the glass sun-
roof, the system is checking whether a remote
control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat
opening or closing if necessary.<
Unlocking
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
> For the driver's door, touch the area high-
lighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your fin-
ger for approx. 1 second.
> For the remaining doors, touch the area
highlighted in the picture, arrow 3, with your
finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
Please make sure that the ignition and all
electronic systems/consumers are
switched off before locking to save the bat-
tery.<
Comfort closing
Hold a finger or the back of the hand on the sur-
face, arrow 2 or 3.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 36 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The windows and the glass sunroof
*
are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<
Opening luggage compartment lid
separately
Press the button on the luggage compartment
lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage
compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen.
The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 55.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will
start immediately.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is
only possible to restart the engine within
approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.
Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. Then open or close the
vehicle with the buttons on the remote control
or with a key. To start the engine following this,
insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced if necessary.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 28.
2. Remove cover.
3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 37 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
> Press switch beyond resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Separate switches for the rear windows are
located in the rear.
For information on using the comfort operation
at the door lock or with the remote control, refer
to page 31 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 36.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch pro-
tection system.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-
dren, for example. The LED lights up when this
safety feature is activated.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
trolled closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<
Glass sunroof*, electric
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 38 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Opening, closing
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
together for as long as you hold the switch
in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly pressing the switch
stops the motion.
In a similar manner, the glass sunroof closes
when you slide the switch forward. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on using the comfort operation
at the door lock or with the remote control, refer
to page 31 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 36.
Opening and closing automatically
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The following movements are also automatic:
> Press the switch with the sunroof open: the
sunroof is raised all the way.
> When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the
switch in the opening direction: the sunroof
is opened all the way.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the sunroof with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when
closing from roughly the center of the roof
opening or when closing from the raised posi-
tion, the closing action is interrupted and the
glass sunroof reopens a short way.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.
The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Moving manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass sunroof manually.
1. Fold the cover panel down, if necessary
using a screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 210.
2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 210, into the
opening provided. Move the glass sunroof
ba8_m5us.book Seite 39 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
in the desired direction. The arrow below
indicates the rotation direction for closing.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 40 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the sitting position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the fol-
lowing section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 52.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbags, otherwise injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 86.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 44.
Safety belts
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle is provided with five seats, which
are all equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-
sible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in
the upper body area periodically to readjust the
tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the
restraint of the safety belt.<
Safety belts, refer to page 45.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 41 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
42
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally pro-
vided by the belt.<
Please observe the information on damage to
safety belts provided on page 46 and the infor-
mation on the active front
head restraints
*
on
page 45.
Adjusting seat
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 41.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest width
5 Backrest
6 Head restraint height
7 Shoulder support
*
8 Thigh support
9 Lumbar support
*
Shoulder support*
This also supports the back in the shoulder
area, This provides a relaxed driving position
and helps relieve stress on the shoulder mus-
cles.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press front
or rear section of switch.
> Shift curvature up or down: press upper or
lowers section of switch.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 42 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting active backrest width*
First set a comfortable backrest width, see
above. Based on the backrest width set, the lat-
eral support is automatically adapted to the cur-
rent driving situation.
The adaptation of the backrest width and the
speed of the adjustment vary depending on the
program. You can select from among three pro-
grams from comfort to sport. The "Sport" pro-
gram provides increased lateral support on both
sides when driving through a quick succession
of curves.
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
program is shown on the Control Display. The
LED in the button lights up.
To switch off: press button longer.
You can also activate your preferred program
for the active backrest width adjustment of the
driver's seat with the button on the steering
wheel, refer to MDrive on page 50.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the backrest width
temporarily opens all the way.
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
You can store and request two different posi-
tions for the driver's seat and passenger seat
*
,
exterior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 55.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
The LED goes out.
Requesting
Do not request a position from the mem-
ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 43 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
44
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Requesting with remote control
The last positions of the driver's seat, the exte-
rior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
You can choose when the position is requested:
> Request when unlocking vehicle
> Request when opening driver's door
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
9. Press the controller.
To cancel the request:
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident. Only remove the head restraints if no
one will be sitting on the seat in question. Rein-
stall the head restraints before transporting
passengers, as otherwise the head restraint
cannot provide its protective function.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 44 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Front seats: height adjustment
Removing:
1. Move the head restraint up as far as possi-
ble.
2. Pull out the head restraint completely with a
firm movement.
Installing:
1. Slide the switch upward for a maximum of
approx. 10 seconds, however if possible
only until a change in the humming noise
indicates that the head restraint bracket is
moved all the way to the top.
2. Insert the head restraint and press down on
both sides until it is heard and felt to
engage.
Front seats: angle adjustment
Swivel the head restraint.
On seats with a shoulder support
*
you adjust
the distance to the back of the head with the
shoulder support, refer to page 42.
Adjusting side extensions*
You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
Front head restraints, active*
Seats with a shoulder support
*
are equipped
with an active head restraint.
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers
and do not hang objects, e.g. clothes
hangers, on the head restraints or attach any
accessories to the seat or head restraint. Other-
wise the protective function of the active head
restraints will be impaired and personal safety
endangered.<
Rear seats: height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint downward.
Removing
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 41.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 45 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
46
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-
nal sounds. A message also appears on
the Control Display. Please check
whether the safety belt is correctly positioned.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Releasing
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 42.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into
the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the
left and right. The belt buckle embossed with
the word CENTER is intended exclusively for
use by passengers riding in the center position.
Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioners and any
child restraint systems, and have the belt
anchor points checked. Only have this work
carried out at a BMW center or at a workshop
that works according to BMW repair proce-
dures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Otherwise correct operation of this safety
equipment is not guaranteed.<
Seat heating
Front
The appearance and arrangement of the but-
tons may vary depending on the equipment.
1 Seat heating, three LEDs
2 Seat heating, one LED
3 Seat heating with active seat ventilation
*
Press the respective button once per tempera-
ture level. The temperature level is shown on
the Control Display with buttons 2 and 3.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 46 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The maximum temperature is supplied when
three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press button longer.
Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press
the controller.
4. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Driver" or "Passenger".
5. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu-
tion.
The setting is applied.
Temperature distribution with active
seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Driver's seat climate" or "Passen-
ger's seat climate" and press the controller.
Turn the controller to adjust the distribution.
The setting is applied.
Rear
Operation similar to front seat heating; two tem-
perature levels, without temperature distribu-
tion.
Active seat ventilation*
The appearance and arrangement of the but-
tons may vary depending on the equipment.
1 Active seat ventilation
2 Active seat ventilation with seat heating
ba8_m5us.book Seite 47 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
48
Press the respective button once per ventila-
tion level. The ventilation level appears on the
Control Display. The maximum level is supplied
when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press button longer.
The highest level is used for rapid cooling,
e.g. when the vehicle has become heated
up.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci-
dent risk.<
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 43.
Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold mirrors
in and out up to a speed of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in
car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir-
rors that have been manually folded in back into
the correct position. Mirrors that were folded in
are folded out automatically at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-
erwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<
Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the motor is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Tilting down passenger-side exterior
mirror – automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or transmission posi-
tion R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 48 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi-
cles at night, turn the knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the interior rearview mirror. One is integrated
into the glass of the mirror, while the other is
located at an offset position on the rear of the
mirror housing.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on page 43.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
When the steering wheel heater is operating,
the LED in the button lights up.
Programmable button on steering
wheel
You can program the button individually.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 49 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Adjusting
50
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Steering wheel
button" is selected and press the controller.
A list of different functions appears:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions for the navigation
system
*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control on page 98
> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
*
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers
> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
Operating function
Press the button on the steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for the button:
> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Press button longer.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.
MDrive
With MDrive you can configure several individ-
ual settings for your vehicle on the Control Dis-
play and activate them with the button on the
steering wheel.
Configuring settings
With the ignition switched on you can set
MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 50 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
The functions contained in MDrive are dis-
played:
> "SMG Drivelogic"
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic: Shifting modes and Drive-
logic driving programs, refer to page 60
> "EDC"
Programs of the Electronic Damping
Control, refer to page 81
> "DSC"
Dynamic Stability Control and
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 79
> "POWER"
Programs of the M Engine Dynamic
Control, refer to page 58
> "Backrest:"
*
Programs of the active backrest width
adjustment, refer to page 43
> "Head-Up Display"
*
Views of the Head-Up Display, refer to
page 88
You can reset all settings for MDrive to the
default values:
> "Reset to default"
4. Select the desired function.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to select the desired set-
ting.
"Unchanged" retains the current setting
made outside of MDrive.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating settings
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The settings made on
the Control Display for the functions
contained in MDrive are active.
Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.
If the indicator lamp flashes after pressing
the button, MDrive was unable to react, as
the ABS Antilock Brake System or DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is currently control-
ling the vehicle stability. Press the button
again when the indicator lamp no longer
flashes.<
Even with MDrive activated, you can change
individual settings outside MDrive, e.g. with the
buttons in the center console. To reactivate all
settings made for MDrive on the Control Dis-
play: press the button twice.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 51 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
52
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint sys-
tems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags on the passen-
ger side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury for the child if the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 86.
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions for selection,
installation and use of the child restraint sys-
tems. Otherwise the degree of protection may
be reduced.<
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, the backrest
width adjustment must be open completely.
After mounting the child's seat, no memory
position may be called up and the active back-
rest width adjustment must be deactivated,
otherwise the stability of the child's seat on the
front passenger seat is limited.<
1. After unlocking the vehicle, sit on the front
passenger seat and close the door to call up
the memory position.
2. Completely open the backrest width adjust-
ment, refer to page 42.
3. Deactivate active backrest width adjust-
ment, refer to page 43.
4. Install child's seat.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 52 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-
pletely.
Child restraint system with tether strap
Only use the tether-strap mounting
points to secure child restraint systems,
otherwise the mounting points could be dam-
aged.<
There are three additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows. Fold the corresponding mounting
point upward before using.
Placement of tether strap
Outer seats:
1. Pull the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap through the bracket
of the head restraint.
3. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
4. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point.
Center seat:
1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward
the front.
2. Guide the tether strap through the opening.
3. Fold back the center armrest.
4. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To attach and use a LATCH child restraint
system, follow the operating and safety
instructions of the system manufacturer.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 53 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the child
restraint fixing system.
Make sure that the LATCH anchor fittings
are properly engaged and the child
restraint system firmly contacts the backrest.<
Rear seats
The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are
located at the positions indicated by arrows in
the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Rear seats with through-loading
system*
The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are
located behind the indicated protective caps.
Remove the cover caps before mounting the
child's seat.
On trips
If the vehicle is equipped with rear side
airbags, make sure that children do not
lean out of the child's seat towards the door
panels. Otherwise injuries can be caused if the
side airbags are triggered.<
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:
the door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
Always press the safety switch for the power
windows, refer to page 38, when children are
riding in the rear of the vehicle.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 54 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on.
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation.
Comfort access*
With comfort access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 36.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
Manual transmission: the engine starts
when you depress the brake pedal while
pressing the Start/Stop button.
Sequential Manual Transmission: the engine
starts when you press the Start/Stop button
with the brake depressed and the selector lever
in position P or N.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The last information of the com-
puter selected is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with comfort access
*
by touching the sen-
sitive surface on the door handle, refer to
Locking on page 36
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 65.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 55 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
56
Radio readiness and ignition switched
off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, shift into neutral
*
or move the selector
lever into position N and firmly apply the hand-
brake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed.
Manual transmission*
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the
idling position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Firmly apply the handbrake.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Place selector lever in position N.
4. Press the Start/Stop button.
If the engine does not start, shift back to
the last selector lever position selected,
refer to the instrument cluster display or the
selector lever. Then select position N.
You cannot start off with the hood open.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the sys-
tem design.<
Switching off engine
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking, firmly apply the handbrake, as
otherwise the vehicle could roll.<
Manual transmission*
1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle
stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Firmly apply the handbrake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Firmly apply the handbrake.
2. Engage a driving position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If N is engaged when switching off the
engine, this will be pointed out to you opti-
cally and acoustically.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 56 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-
nal also sounds when starting off. The
handbrake is applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to apply the handbrake
while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it too
firmly. In doing so, continuously press the but-
ton of the handbrake lever. Otherwise, too firm
an application of the handbrake can lock up the
rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to
swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the hand-
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the hand-
brake is applied.<
Manual transmission*
While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane,
press the gearshift lever toward the right,
otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th
gear could result in engine damage.<
When engaging the 1st gear, a slight jolt may
occur. This is operation-related and no reason
for concern.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
When pressing the gearshift lever to the left,
overcome some resistance.
Shift lights
To achieve the best vehicle acceleration with a
sporty driving style, shift lights in the Head-Up
Display
*
indicate the optimum shifting point
briefly before reaching the maximum rpm. Refer
to Shift lights, page 61.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 57 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
58
M Engine Dynamic Control
With M Engine Dynamic Control you can influ-
ence how sporty the reaction of your vehicle to
accelerator pedal movements is to be. Three
programs are available to you.
"P 400" program
In the "P 400" program the engine reacts gently
to movements of the accelerator pedal. This is,
for example, ideal for city driving or driving on
snow. In the process, the fuel consumption is
minimal and the engine output is reduced.
"P 500" program
The "P 500" program provides maximum per-
formance and more spontaneous reaction of
the engine to accelerator pedal movements.
"P 500 Sport" program
In the "P 500 Sport" program the engine reacts
especially spontaneously and uncompromis-
ingly sporty with maximum performance to
accelerator pedal movements.
Selecting program
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Each time the engine is started, the "P 400"
program is activated.
Press the POWER button to activate the
"P 500" program. Pressing the POWER button
repeatedly switches between the programs
"P 400" and "P 500".
You can also activate your preferred program
with the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive on page 50.
Please activate the "P 500 Sport" program with
MDrive.
For the programs "P 500" and "P 500 Sport"
the LED in the POWER button lights up.
Manual transmission
Each time the engine is started, the "P 400"
program is activated.
You can select the programs "P 400", "P 500"
and "P 500 Sport" with the button on the steer-
ing wheel, refer to MDrive on page 50.
Sequential Manual
Transmission with Drivelogic
The concept
The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
with Drivelogic is an automated manual trans-
mission in which an electrohydraulic system
handles the clutching and gear changes.
The Sequential Manual Transmission is oper-
ated with the selector lever and two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Optional manual or automatic operation:
Sequential mode or Drive mode
> Selection option between different driving
programs, Drivelogic, refer to page 60
> Upshift display, shift lights, refer to page 61
> Automatic downshifting and prevention of
incorrect shifting even in Sequential opera-
tion
> Automatic double clutching
ba8_m5us.book Seite 58 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Selector lever positions
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral
> Β: Drive position:
> +: manual upshifting
> –: manual downshifting
> D/S: switch between Drive mode and
Sequential mode
Shiftlock
Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Idle
Always engage before starting engine.
If the driving situation requires, e.g. when down-
shifting on a slippery road surface, the Sequen-
tial Manual Transmission automatically
clutches and then declutches again, i.e. it is not
necessary to engage idling manually.
N is automatically engaged after just a
few seconds when you open the driver's
door or the hood with the engine running and do
not operate either pedals, shift paddles or the
selector lever. In these cases, to start off after
closing the driver's door or the hood, first move
the selector lever into position N and then into
the drive position.<
S Sequential mode
You can shift up and down using the shift pad-
dles or the selector lever. You do not need to
remove your foot from the accelerator to do so.
After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right into the drive posi-
tion Β and the brake pedal is pressed, the
Sequential mode is activated.
Starting off is also possible on a level road sur-
face in second gear, e.g. in case of ice.
In the following situations, the Sequential Man-
ual Transmission thinks for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that would cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the trans-
mission automatically downshifts into first
gear.
> Shortly before dropping below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.
D Drive mode
In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Shifting from Sequential mode to Drive mode:
press selector lever to the right toward D/S.
To switch back into the Sequential mode: press
selector lever to the right again toward D/S or
shift using the shift paddles or the selector
lever.
Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. when
passing, press the accelerator pedal as far
down as it will go. You achieve maximum accel-
eration.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 59 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
60
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Gear 1 to 7, R, N engaged
2 Selected driving program,
matches the number of illuminated fields,
refer to Drivelogic on page 60
3 The currently engaged gear is displayed,
followed by a D in the Drive mode
A flashing gear display indicates to you
that the driver's door is open with the
engine running.
N is automatically engaged after just a few sec-
onds when you open the driver's door or the
hood with the engine running and the vehicle
stopped, and do not operate either pedals, shift
paddles or the selector lever.<
Gear changes
Using selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector lever for-
ward.
Using shift paddles on steering wheel
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift
paddle –.
Drivelogic
With Drivelogic various driving programs are
available to you.
Each time you change between the Sequential
mode and the Drive mode, the respective last
program is active. Exception: after the first
change from the Sequential to the Drive mode,
driving program 3 is active.
In Drive mode
Five driving programs, from relaxed 1 to sporty/
highly dynamic 5 are available for selection.
In Sequential mode
You can choose from six driving programs from
balanced/dynamic 1 to sporty/purist 6.
Each time the engine is started, driving pro-
gram 3 is activated.
Program 6 is only available when the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, refer
to page 79. If DSC is activated, program 6
switches over to 5.
To maintain vehicle stability, always acti-
vate DSC whenever possible.<
Selecting driving program with button
in center console
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
driving program is displayed in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 60.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 60 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Selecting driving program via button
on steering wheel
You can also activate your preferred driving pro-
gram with the button on the steering wheel,
refer to MDrive on page 50.
With the ignition switched on you can set
MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
4. Select "SMG Drivelogic" and press the con-
troller. The first setting is selected.
5. Turn controller to set Drive mode or
Sequential mode.
"Unchanged" retains the current settings
made outside of MDrive.
6. Press controller to select driving programs.
7. Turn controller to set driving program.
8. Press the controller.
Shift lights
To achieve the best vehicle acceleration with a
sporty driving style in the Sequential mode,
shift lights in the Head-Up Display
*
indicate the
optimum shifting point briefly before reaching
the maximum rpm.
1. Switch on Head-Up Display, refer to Head-
Up Display on page 88.
2. Select display "M View" on Head-Up Dis-
play, refer to Selecting displays on page 88.
The current engine speed is highlighted on
the tachometer.
3. When approaching the maximum rpm, yel-
low illuminated fields 1 of the tachometer
consecutively indicate the approaching
upshift point.
4. Shift at the latest when the red indicator
field lights up 2.
When the permissible maximum rpm is
reached, the entire tachometer begins to flash.
When the maximum rpm is exceeded, the fuel
supply is cut off to protect the engine. Always
avoid engine speeds in this range.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
ba8_m5us.book Seite 61 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
62
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<
Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signal flashes three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Adjusting rain sensor
sensitivity level
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor
The wiper operation is controlled automatically
as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sen-
sor is located on the windshield, directly in front
of the interior rearview mirror.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 62 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Activating rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the knurled wheel 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
headlamps are simultaneously washed at
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washing mechanisms if
there is any danger that the fluid will
freeze on the windshield. If you do so, your
vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing,
use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer
fluid. Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise
you will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks and
open flames, and store it in tightly closed con-
tainers well out of the reach of children. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
Only add washer fluid with the engine
cooled down to exclude contact with hot
engine components. Otherwise there is a dan-
ger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is
spilled.<
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser-
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering col-
umn. To maintain the specified speed, the sys-
tem brakes if the engine braking effect is not
sufficient on a downhill grade. Speed can drop
ba8_m5us.book Seite 63 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving
64
on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi-
cient.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise you could loose control of the vehi-
cle and cause an accident.<
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
3 Interrupting and deactivating system
4 Resuming stored speed
Maintaining, storing and increasing
speed
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The speed currently being driven is maintained
and stored. The display 1 in the speedometer,
see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press lever to resistance point for a longer time:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle
speed is reduced.
Interrupting system
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3: the dis-
play 1 in the speedometer changes color.
In addition, the system is automatically inter-
rupted:
> when braking
> for manual shifting with the shift paddles or
the selector lever
> when the DSC comes on
> when you brake with the handbrake
Resuming stored speed
Press button 4:
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
Deactivating system
> Press the lever up or down twice, arrow 3
> Switch off the ignition
The speed stored in the memory is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
ba8_m5us.book Seite 64 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Time, outside temperature, refer to Com-
puter on page 66
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Press button:
> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> with ignition switched off, odometer is
briefly displayed
Tachometer
The advance warning field, arrow 1, and the red
warning field, arrow 2, change depending on
the engine temperature. As the engine temper-
ature rises, the permissible engine speed also
increases. Avoid allowing the engine speed to
rise as far as the orange warning field whenever
possible.
Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn-
ing field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter-
rupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 206.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 65 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
66
Engine oil thermometer
The general operating temperature lies
between 1757/806 and 2507/1206. Do
not exceed a value of approx. 2657/1306.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, the per-
missible engine speed, and with it the available
engine output is reduced.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/
70 liters. You will find information on refueling
on page 196.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument cluster
To display the information, press the BC button
on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Time and outside temperature
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Oil level, refer to Checking engine oil level
on page 204
Manual transmission:
The cruising range, average fuel con-
sumption and oil level are shown in the lower
display in place of the gear indicator.
It is possible to change between the time and
data display by pressing the CHECK button.<
Time
Setting the time, refer to page 74.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-
fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 75.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 66 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset average fuel consumption: press BC
button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
For different routes
You can display the average speed for two dif-
ferent routes on the Control Display, refer to the
following and to Trip computer
*
.
Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive.
For explanation of principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination and
remaining distance:
> Entering a distance manually in the com-
puter, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system
*
, refer to page 120.
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
Resetting values
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the con-
troller again.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 67 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
68
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to
your destination. If needed, hold it against a
slight resistance to enter a larger differ-
ence.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically preset during the
destination guidance of the navigation sys-
tem
*
.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a
vacation trip.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Starting or stopping the trip computer, or reset-
ting all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip com-
puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Onboard info" or "Trip computer".
3. Press the controller.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
The first oil change displayed at approx.
1,200 miles/2,000 km signals that the break-in
check is due.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 68 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-
mine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<
Additional information
You can select a display of more detailed infor-
mation on the maintenance scope on the Con-
trol Display. For explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated inspections.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 74, otherwise the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 69 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
70
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is selected.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is selected.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
means that a Check Control message has
been generated. The symbol continues to be
visible even when the Check Control message
disappears after a short time. The warning
lamps and text messages are stored and can be
displayed later, also refer to page 71.
Explanatory text messages
Text message at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis-
played indicator and warning lamps.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 70 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can display additional information on most
Check Control messages later, e.g. on the
cause of the malfunction and on corresponding
need for action, see below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the CHECK button on turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions
occur simultaneously, they are displayed in
succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.
2. Press the button:
When the button is pressed again, a differ-
ent message is displayed.
Displaying additional information later
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Service" is
selected and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 71 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Check Control messages"
is selected and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
To exit the display:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Indication of malfunction urgency
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
stored Check Control messages are also dis-
played with the following symbols:
No malfunctions are present in the moni-
tored systems.
Malfunctions are present in the moni-
tored systems. Depending on the mal-
function, supplementary information is
shown on the Control Display.
The symbols also indicate the status of the ser-
vice requirements display, refer to page 68.
Displays after completion of trip
Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.
Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes-
sages are present, you can continue to press
the CHECK button to view them in succession.
The display goes out
> automatically after a brief period
> when you press the CHECK button again
for approx. 2 seconds
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 72 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
5. Select the speed value and press the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If
needed, hold it against a slight resistance
to enter a larger difference.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically activated.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system adopts your current
speed as the limit.
Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is automatically activated.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*
:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation
in the background.<
Settings on Control Display
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 73 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Setting time
1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
2. Move the controller once to the front if nec-
essary to change to the first field from the
top.
3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Making settings
1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The changed time is stored.
Switching on hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting time format
1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 74 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Setting date
1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first section of the date display is
selected, in this case the month.
3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is selected.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Changing date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Brightness" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Units of measure
You can change the units of measure for con-
sumption, distances, temperature and pres-
sure.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Units" is selected and press
the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 75 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
6. Select the menu item to be set and press
the controller.
7. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Language on Control Display
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can change the language of the
text displays.
7. Select and activate the desired language by
pressing the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Volume of warning tones*
On vehicles equipped with a single drive, you
can increase or decrease the volume of the
warning tones, e.g. for the safety belt reminder,
compared to the entertainment sound output.
The warning tones have a specified minimum
and maximum volume that cannot be dropped
below or exceeded.
1. Select "Tone / volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Volume settings" and press the
controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Select "Warning tones" and
press the controller.
4. If necessary, change the field and turn the
controller.
The setting is applied.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 76 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display
*
alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sounds for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor-
ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise the physical circumstances would mean
that the system warning was too late.<
Automatic activation
The system starts to operate approx. 1 second
after you shift into reverse gear or move the
selector lever into position R with the engine
running or the ignition switched on.
Wait this short time before driving off.
Manual activation
Press the button, the LED lights up.
Manual deactivation
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, the position is corre-
spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc. As the distance between
vehicle and object decreases, the intervals
between the tones become shorter. If the dis-
tance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-
functioning. Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-
ers for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
Exhaust gases near the rear sensors can cause
a signal tone to sound.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 77 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
78
PDC with visual warning*
You can also have the system show distances
to objects on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already shown there before
a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Vehicle / Tires" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "PDC" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-
troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with tow bars and trailer cou-
plings, or thin and wedge-shaped objects etc.
Low objects already displayed, e.g. curbs, can
also disappear from the detection area of the
sensors again before or after a continuous tone
already sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g.
ledges, cannot be detected.
Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the
vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely refer to page 113.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steer-
ing response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 78 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC optimizes vehicle stability and traction. It
also detects unstable driving states such as
understeering and oversteering, and helps
keep the vehicle on course within the physical
limits by reducing the engine output and by
braking at the wheels.
The DSC is operational every time you start the
engine.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin further by taking risks.<
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine is started.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp stays lit: DSC is deactivated.
MDynamic Mode MDM
The M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control. It enables driving
with greater longitudinal and lateral accelera-
tion on dry road surfaces, however with limited
vehicle stability. The system does not provide
stabilizing intervention by reducing the engine
output and braking at the wheels until the abso-
lute driving limit is reached. Additional steering
corrections may also be required in this driving
state.
The M Dynamic Mode is deactivated each time
the engine is started.
With the M Dynamic Mode activated, sta-
bilizing interventions are only carried out
to a reduced degree. Take action yourself, oth-
erwise there is a risk of an accident.<
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
DSC activated and the M Dynamic Mode
deactivated whenever possible.<
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine is started.
The indicator lamp stays lit: M Dynamic
Mode is activated.
The indicator lamp lights up continuously and
the DSC indicator lamp flashes: the M Dynamic
Mode is active and controls the drive and brak-
ing forces.
Activating MDM
You activate the M Dynamic Mode with the
button on the steering wheel, refer to MDrive on
page 50.
With the ignition switched on you can set
MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
4. Select "DSC" and press the controller.
5. Select "M Dynamic Mode" and press the
controller.
Sequential Manual Transmission with Drive-
logic:
ba8_m5us.book Seite 79 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
80
Manual transmission
*
:
You can also activate and deactivate the
M Dynamic Mode with the MDM button.
Deactivating MDM again
Press the button on the steering wheel or the
MDM button
*
again; the MDM indicator lamp
goes out.
Deactivating DSC*
Press the DSC OFF button
*
; the DSC indicator
lamp lights up continuously. DSC and MDM are
deactivated.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
When rocking free and starting off from deep
snow or on loose road surfaces, it may be prac-
tical to briefly deactivate DSC.
To maintain vehicle stability, always drive
with the system switched on when possi-
ble. With a manual transmission, DSC cannot
be deactivated.<
Reactivating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button; the indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
You can also activate and deactivate DSC with
the button on the steering wheel, refer to
MDrive on page 50.
Malfunction in driving-stability control
systems
The warning lamp for the brake system
lights up, together with the indicator
and warning lamps for ABS, DSC and
Tire Pressure Control or Flat Tire Mon-
itor. A message appears on the Control
Display. The driving-stability control
systems have failed. Conventional
braking efficiency remains available
without limitations. While you may con-
tinue, you should remember to proceed
cautiously and drive defensively while avoiding
full brake applications. In addition, the Tire
Pressure Control or the Flat Tire Monitor has
also failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The DSC warning lamp lights up.
A malfunction has occurred in DSC
including MDM. The stability mainte-
nance functions are no longer available.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 80 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The vehicle remains operational. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible.
The brake system warning lamp lights
up yellow. A message appears on the
Control Display. The brake assistant is
defective. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
EDC Electronic Damping
Control
The concept
If the influencing variables such as road surface
quality or operating conditions such as steer-
ing, braking etc. change, the damping automat-
ically adjusts to the new conditions within a
fraction of a second.
You can choose from three programs.
"Comfort" program
Select the "Comfort" program if you want com-
fort-oriented coordination of shock absorbers
and steering.
"Normal" program
The "Normal" program offers a balanced mix-
ture of the comfort and the sport program.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want a con-
sistently sporty coordination of shock absorb-
ers and steering.
Selecting program
Sequential Manual Transmission with Drive-
logic:
Manual transmission:
Press the EDC button repeatedly:
> "Comfort": LED off.
> "Normal": one LED lights up.
> "Sport": both LEDs light up.
The last selected program is active each time
the engine is started.
You can also activate your preferred program
with the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive on page 50.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the infla-
tion pressures in the tires as you drive. The sys-
tem provides an alert whenever the inflation
pressure drops significantly in relation to the
pressure in another tire.
In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius
and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels
ba8_m5us.book Seite 81 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
82
change. This change is detected and is
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
each time the tire inflation pressure is cor-
rected and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically. Do not initialize the sys-
tem when driving with snow chains.<
With Sequential Manual Transmission via the
button in the center console:
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button at least 4 seconds, how-
ever not longer than 2 minutes. After
releasing the button, the warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up yellow for a
few seconds. Warning lamp, refer to Indica-
tion of a flat tire. The message "Initializing
FTM ..." appears on the Control Display for
a few seconds.
3. Start to drive. The initialization finishes dur-
ing driving without feedback.
Via iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FTM" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 82 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
"resetting FTM …" is displayed for a few
seconds. The warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up yellow for a few sec-
onds.
9. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving
without feedback.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure
loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-
fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify damaged tire. To do this, check the
tire inflation pressure using the M Mobility
System, refer to Producing tire inflation
pressure on page 215.
3. Repair flat tire with M Mobility System, refer
to page 213, or replace the damaged wheel,
refer to Changing wheels on page 215.
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth-
erwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered
with by other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 83 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
84
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "TPM" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla-
tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-
ing driving. The tires are shown in green on the
Control Display.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-
fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden-
tify the damaged tire on the vehicle.
3. Repairing flat tire with M Mobility System,
refer to page 213, or replace the damaged
wheel or wheels, refer to Changing wheels*
on page 215.
The spare tire
*
is equipped with the necessary
TPM electronics and is also monitored after
mounting and after resetting the system.
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop informed on handling TPM which
ba8_m5us.book Seite 84 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheel is mounted without TPM elec-
tronics
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare
*
, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires. As an added safety fea-
ture, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signif-
icantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS
is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator lights up, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Brake force display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 85 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
86
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags in front and rear
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 41.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag restraint system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the air-
bag system. This category includes the uphol-
stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the doors and the roof pillars
along with the sides of the headliner. Do not
attempt to remove or dismantle the steering
wheel. Do not touch the individual components
immediately after the system has been trig-
gered, because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to
service the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or undesired airbag triggering,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The front and
side airbags on the front passenger side are
activated or deactivated accordingly by the sys-
tem.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, observe the safety infor-
mation and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely refer to page 52.
The front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side can be deactivated for teenagers and
adults in certain sitting positions; then the indi-
cator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
ba8_m5us.book Seite 86 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
up. In these cases, change the sitting position
so that the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired status cannot be produced by changing
the sitting position, transport the correspond-
ing person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat cov-
ers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other
items onto the front passenger seat unless they
are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not
lay objects under the seat which could press
against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor-
rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface
cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side
depending on the seat occupation. The indica-
tor lamp shows whether the front passenger
airbags are activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are not activated.
Most child's seats are detected by the
system. Especially the child's seats
required by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is
manufactured. After installing a child's seat,
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that
the child's seat has been detected and the front
passenger airbags are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
However, the front and side airbags on the
front passenger side are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 55, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 87 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
88
Head-Up Display*
The concept
With the Head-Up Display important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
take in this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Selecting displays
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display"
is selected and press the controller.
7. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis-
play.
8. Press the controller.
The information is shown on the Head-
Up Display.
"M View": the M view is shown in the
Head-Up Display. Information unavailable in
the M view appears on the Control Display
in gray and cannot be selected.
"M View": the default view is displayed.
The M view for the Head-Up Display can also be
selected with the button on the steering
wheel, refer to MDrive on page 50.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Default view
1 Navigation instructions
2 Stored desired speed of cruise control
3 Speed
ba8_m5us.book Seite 88 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
M view
1 Current engine speed, highlighted
2 Advance warning field of tachometer
3 Red warning field of tachometer, also refer
to Tachometer on page 65
4 Speed
5 Gear display
For information on the shift lights in the
tachometer, refer to page 61.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the basic setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Brightness" is
selected and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis-
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain seating positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the basic
setting checked at a BMW center.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the require-
ments of the Head-Up Display to enable a pre-
cise display. A film in the windshield prevents
the double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 89 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
90
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the separate Caring for
your vehicle brochure.
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 90 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime running lamps
*
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
*
2 Low beams and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*
, daytime run-
ning lamps
*
, welcome lamps and Adaptive
Head Light
*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati-
cally switched off when the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos-
sible to start the engine. It is preferable to
switch on the roadside parking lamps on one
side, refer to page 93.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light
*
is active. The LED next to the symbol
lights up when the low beams are on. You can
activate the daytime running lamps, refer to
page 92. In the situations named above, the
system then automatically switches over to the
low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If, when parking the vehicle, you leave the light
switch in position 2 or 3, the parking lamps and
the interior lamp light up briefly when the vehi-
cle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 91 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Lamps
92
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-
troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration or deactivate the func-
tion via iDrive.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired
duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps*
The daytime running lamps light up in posi-
tion 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains in
position 1, the parking lamps light up after the
ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps*
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 92 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to approx. 45 mph/
70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when
turning, turning lamps are switched on that light
up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch into the automatic headlamp control
position, refer to page 91.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front pas-
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamps
are active and illuminate the outer area of
curves.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking:
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 93 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Lamps
94
Instrument lighting
The lighting intensity can be adjusted with the
knurled wheel with the parking lamps/low
beams switched on.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting and courtesy lamps
*
are controlled
automatically.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 55.<
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press the button.
If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting and courtesy lamps are to remain
switched off continually, press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are located in the front and rear
adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the button
to switch the lamps on and off.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 94 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Air directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air for the upper body region, refer to
Front ventilation on page 99
3 Air to footwell
4 Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment
5 Manual air distribution, driver's side
6 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
7 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat utilization
8 AUTO program
9 Switching cooling function on and off
manually
10 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment
11 Manual air distribution, front passenger side
12 Maximum cooling
13 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
14 LED for residual heat utilization and parked-
car ventilation system
15 Rear window defroster
ba8_m5us.book Seite 95 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
96
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
pleasant to you.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 29.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-
ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program
You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
The respective current setting is briefly dis-
played when the button on the Control Display
is pressed.
You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO
program via iDrive.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The marked intensity of the automatic
program is switched on.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible
at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi-
mum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When changing between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating output, regardless of the outside tem-
perature.
Adjusting temperature in upper body
region
1. Press the button to display the current set-
ting on the Control Display.
2. Select the field by moving the controller and
turning the controller to adjust the temper-
ature.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 96 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can also adjust the temperature in the
upper body region with iDrive.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the field by moving the controller and
turning the controller to adjust the temper-
ature.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
while. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, upper wires are used as an antenna
and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.
Manual air distribution
You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle
interior via various programs, separately for the
driver's and passenger's side:
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
> Individual program
Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired air distribution of the
respective program is shown on
the Control Display.
Adjusting air distribution individually –
individual program
Your settings are stored in this program.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
The driver's and front passenger side can
be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side
if necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's or front passen-
ger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the con-
troller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 97 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
98
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Driver's side:
1 Air directed toward the windshield and side
windows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
Front passenger side:
4 Air for the upper body
5 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
manual air distribution settings.<
The automatic mode for the air volume remains
effective with manual air distribution.
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally with the AUTO program. The passenger
compartment can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/06 and with
the engine running.
The automatic climate control changes over to
the lowest temperature and switches into the
recirculated-air mode. The maximum air vol-
ume only flows out of the vents for the upper
body. Therefore, open these vents for maxi-
mum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system then recircu-
lates the air currently within the vehicle. During
AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in
the outside air and controls the shut-off auto-
matically.
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recircu-
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time, as the air qual-
ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu-
ously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Turn to the right, see arrow.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
> with engine at operating temperature
> with sufficient battery voltage
ba8_m5us.book Seite 98 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> at an outside temperature below 777/
256
The LED lights up when the function is
switched on.
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.
Switching automatic climate control on
and off
1. Turn to the left to minimum air volume.
2. After approx. 1 second, turn to the left
again.
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.
Front ventilation
1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close
vent outlets
2 Levers to change the vent outlet direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets, otherwise these could be
catapulted outwards and lead to injuries.<
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.
Rear ventilation
1 Knurled wheel to smoothly open and close
vent outlets
2 Knurled wheel to adjust the temperature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Levers to change the vent outlet direction
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a stan-
dard part of your scheduled maintenance.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 99 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Climate
100
The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent
outlets must be open for the system to operate.
The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
The parked-car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is selected.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is selected.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating activation time
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.
The activation time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked car
ventilation has switched on.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 100 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The parked car ventilation is only avail-
able for activation within the next
24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 101 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
102
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 103.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 55.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right-hand memory
button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the
LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs
are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button
on the original hand-held transmitter and
the desired memory button 1 on the inte-
grated universal remote control. The LED 2
flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2
flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the
LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 102 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the mem-
ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Deleting stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
quickly:
All stored programs are deleted.
Individual programs cannot be deleted.
Sun blinds*
Sun blind for rear window
Press the button on the driver's door.
Sun blinds for rear side windows
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle. The light in the glove compart-
ment switches on.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 103 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
104
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Locking
Lock with a key.
If you only hand over the remote control
without the integrated key, e.g. for valet
parking, refer to page 28, the glove compart-
ment cannot be unlocked.<
Rechargeable flashlight
The flashlight is located on the left side of the
glove compartment.
The flashlight can remain plugged in continu-
ously. Pull the flashlight out of the socket when
needed.
To avoid possibly damaging the lamp,
always ensure that it is switched off
before inserting it in the socket.<
Center armrest, front
The compartment in the center armrest is
divided into two sections.
Opening cover
Press the button. The cover opens somewhat
and can be folded upwards.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper
section contains a compartment with a mat that
can be removed for cleaning or a telephone cra-
dle
*
.
Opening upper compartment
Press button and fold cover upward.
Accessing lower compartment
Press the button at the front and fold the upper
compartment or the telephone cradle upward.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 104 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ventilating lower compartment*
Push the slide in the lower compartment
upward.
Depending on the automatic climate con-
trol setting, the temperature inside the
ventilated compartment may be higher than in
the rest of the interior. Should this be the case,
push the slide downward to close off the venti-
lation.<
Adjusting
Push the illustrated section of the center arm-
rest into the desired position.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-In connection, refer to page 165.
> USB/audio interface
*
, refer to page 166.
Storage compartments
Storage compartments are located in the cen-
ter console and in the rear.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats, and a net
*
is provided in the front
passenger footwell.
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets or the net, otherwise
there is an increased risk of injury in an acci-
dent.<
In front of gearshift lever*
Clothes hooks
Clothes hooks are located near the grab han-
dles in the rear.
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
Cup holders
Do not place containers made of glass in
the cup holders. This would lead to an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent. Do not force containers that are too large
into the cup holders, otherwise damage could
result.<
Opening
Briefly press the button.
Closing
Press the cover in the center and push in the
cup holder.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 105 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
106
Ashtray, front*
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Emptying
Press the button, see arrow. The ashtray rises
and can be removed.
Cigarette lighter, front*
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Ashtray, rear*
Emptying
Press the entire cover down. The ashtray rises
and can be removed.
Cigarette lighter, rear
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 106 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power
outlets in the vehicle.
In front passenger footwell
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
In the rear center console
Depending on the equipment, the sockets in
the rear are covered with caps or equipped with
a lighter. Refer to Cigarette lighter, front,
page 106.
Access to socket:
Remove respective cap or lighter.
In cargo bay
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
Center armrest, rear
Storage tray:
Pull the cover upward, arrow 1.
Access to cup holders:
Press button 2 and open the cover.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 107 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
108
Through-loading system*
Opening
1. Open the buckle of the center safety belt in
the rear and insert the latch plate at the end
of the belt into the fixture on the rear win-
dow shelf.
2. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go, refer to page 45.
3. To release the rear backrest, pull the corre-
sponding lever in the cargo bay.
4. The unlocked rear backrest moves forward
slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the
head restraint.
Closing
1. Fold the rear backrest into the seating posi-
tion and engage.
When you return the seat to its upright
position, make sure that the catch
engages properly. If it is not properly engaged,
transported cargo could enter the vehicle dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger
the vehicle occupants.<
2. Release the latch plate from the bracket on
the rear window shelf and insert it into the
buckle of the center safety belt. The latch
plate must audibly engage.
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo-bay nets
*
or luggage
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 116.
Ski bag*
Designed for safe, clean transport of up to
4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/2.10 m
in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend to con-
tract, reducing its overall capacity.
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo bay opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this also opens the
cover in the cargo bay.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 108 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining
strap into the center safety belt buckle that
is marked CENTER.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger occupants dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to put it to other
uses.
1. Pull the handle forward and pull the ski bag
up and out.
2. Close the cover in the cargo bay.
Your BMW center will be glad to provide
you with more detailed information on the
various items of equipment.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 109 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 110 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
Driving tips
ba8_m5us.book Seite 111 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
112
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin-
ues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Do not use the driving programs 5 and 6 during
break-in, refer to Drivelogic on page 60.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 5,500 rpm or 105 mph/
170 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,000 miles/5,000 km
The engine and driving speed can gradually be
increased up to a continuous vehicle speed of
135 mph/220 km/h. Only drive at top speed
briefly, e.g. when passing.
Transmission
The function of the transmission is only at its
optimized level after driving a distance of
approx. 300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed
engine speeds of 5,500 rpm during this time.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch is only at its opti-
mized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. With manual transmission:
during this break-in period, engage the clutch
gently.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
General driving notes
Closing luggage compartment lid
Operate the vehicle only when the lug-
gage compartment lid is completely
closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could pene-
trate into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances should make it abso-
lutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the
luggage compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-
mate control to a high level, refer to
page 97.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
ba8_m5us.book Seite 112 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
113
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail
pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Mobile communications devices in
vehicle
BMW discourages the use of mobile
communications devices, e.g. mobile
phones, inside the vehicle without a direct con-
nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can influence one another. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation which
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Mini-
mum tire tread on page 200.
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Starting off
On slopes
The starting assistant enables starting off on
slopes virtually without rolling back.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Make sure that the handbrake is released.
3. Release the footbrake and drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 1 second after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, drive off quickly,
otherwise the starting assistant no longer holds
the vehicle after approx. 1 second and it begins
to roll back.<
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accel-
erator, but apply the footbrake or handbrake
instead. Otherwise overheating and heavy wear
can result in the area of the Sequential Manual
Transmission.<
To protect the clutch of the Sequential Manual
Transmission from overheating, the starting-off
behavior is changed under heavy loading, e.g. a
rapid succession of starts on slopes. This can
be noticed from shaking during starting off.
On a slippery surface
1. Select "P 400" program of M Engine
Dynamic Control, refer to page 58.
2. Gently press accelerator pedal to prevent
wheels from spinning when starting off.
Clutch protection with manual
transmission
Be sure to avoid riding the clutch for longer peri-
ods.
Your BMW M5 is equipped with an overload
protection for the clutch. Riding the clutch for
longer periods is detected and the engine man-
agement system limits the engine speed to pro-
tect the clutch. This can result in the vehicle fail-
ing to accelerate when the clutch pedal is
partially depressed.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
The pulsing of he brake pedal indicates that the
ABS is controlling braking.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 113 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
114
In certain braking situations the perforated
brake rotors can cause operating noises which,
however, have not effect on the performance
and operating safety of the brake system.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.<
Sequential Manual Transmission: Do not
drive in idle or with the engine switched
off, otherwise there will be no engine braking
action or support of the braking force and steer-
ing.
Manual transmission: do not drive with the
clutch depressed, in idle or with the engine
switched off, otherwise there will be no engine
braking action or support of the braking force
and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys-
tem during operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 48,
otherwise they could be damaged due to the
width of the vehicle.
General information on the care and mainte-
nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.
Ground clearance
Make sure that sufficient ground clear-
ance is available. To drive down curbs,
select the "Sport" program of the EDC Elec-
tronic Damping Control, refer to page 81, to
keep the ground clearance as uniform as possi-
ble. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged.<
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 114 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
115
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving con-
ditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
rear backrest.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 115 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
116
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net
*
, luggage straps, or
securing straps to hold down small and
lightweight luggage and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the cargo bay are used to
secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer
to illustration.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary.
Use only the lashing eyes to secure heavy-duty
cargo straps, refer to illustration, otherwise the
cargo straps could become detached or the
vehicle could be damaged.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 228, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak-
ing or evasive maneuvers.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Please comply with the precau-
tions included with the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the door
openings.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
its handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under
Weights on page 228.
The load on the roof must be evenly distributed
and must not extend outward beyond the limits
of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest
pieces on the bottom. Be sure that adequate
clearance is maintained for raising the glass
sunroof, and that objects do not project into the
opening path of the luggage compartment lid.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 116 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 118 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
ba8_m5us.book Seite 119 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Starting navigation system
120
Starting navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. The latest version is available at
your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up. The navigation DVD is automati-
cally pulled in.
2. Allow several seconds for the system to
scan the data from the DVD.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-
sible that it is blocked. In this case a message is
also shown on the Control Display.
Display in assistance window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another applica-
tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
4. Press the controller.
*
ba8_m5us.book Seite 120 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Displaying arrow view in map view
If the navigation system suggests a change of
direction, the arrow view is briefly displayed.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions"
and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 121 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
122
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 125
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 128
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 129
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 130
> Selecting home address, refer to page 132
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 134.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory/direct selection
buttons, refer to page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. If you do not observe this precau-
tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants
and other road users.<
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 133. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town/
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 122 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
123
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on
the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
In order to be able to start the destination guid-
ance, at least the town/city of the destination or
its zip code must be entered.
Entering destination via town/city
name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press control-
ler.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press and hold the con-
troller.
4. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> Enter blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to the third field from the top if nec-
essary. Turn the controller until the town/
city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.
Entering destination by zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 123 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
124
> Enter a blank space:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press and hold the con-
troller.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered exactly like the desti-
nation.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering
destination
You can also enter a street without entering a
destination. In this case all streets of the
entered country are offered for selection.
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered des-
tination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. Change to upper field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the coun-
try appears and press the controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 124 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Entering house number
All house numbers stored for the street on the
navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. Enter the house number:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If the destination guidance does not need to
be started immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 129.
Entering destination via
voice*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice command system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti-
vate the voice command function for this pur-
pose if necessary.
With {Options} you can have the possible
commands read aloud.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the country of destination in
the language of the voice command system.
Entering destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling destination
To enter the destination, spell it using the
orthography of the country of destination.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 desti-
nations that match your entries. Up to
6 entries are displayed at once on the Con-
trol Display.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the country of destina-
tion.
1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
destination. The more letters you say,
the more exactly the system recognizes
the town/city.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 125 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
126
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*
Towns/cities and streets located in the region
where the language of the voice command sys-
tem is spoken can be entered as an entire word.
Example: to enter a US destination as an entire
word, the system language must be English.
The condition for this is the use of a suitable
navigation DVD.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphasis and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to request the destina-
tion.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina-
tions that match your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Destinations that sound the same which
cannot be differentiated by the system
are summarized in a separate list and shown as
a destination followed by three dots.
Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then
select the desired town/city from this list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination.
To enter the house number:
Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.
Say the house number as individual numbers.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
A destination is suggested by the system.
2. Select town/city:
> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries in the list:
{Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
2. Say the name of the destination.
A destination is suggested by the system.
3. Select town/city:
> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To reenter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 126 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be stored in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town/city or
street of the destination, then you can enter the
destination by using a map. You can use the
cursor to select the destination on the map and
then adopt it into the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select destination with cursor.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward and back.
5. To adopt or store the destination in the des-
tination guidance system, press the con-
troller.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the cur-
rent position in the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for the destination entry can also be
displayed in the map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 127 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
Selecting destination using
information
You can obtain a display of selected destina-
tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt
them into the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from the current loca-
tion.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
These destinations are displayed on the
Control Display.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of the information and
symbols is dependent on the respec-
tive navigation DVD.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To adopt the address in the destination
list and start the destination guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 128 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Symbols in map view
If, for example, you have selected the category
Hotels, the hotels are shown on the map as
symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the controller.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con-
troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To display the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the con-
troller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 entered destinations are shown in
the destination list. You can display these desti-
nations and adopt them in the destination guid-
ance system.
For example, to plan a longer route, you can
store all destinations you want to drive to in
advance in the destination list, refer to Entering
a destination manually on page 122.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The last destination entered is the first item in
the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion during destination guide.
To display additional destinations from the des-
tination list:
Turn the controller.
Applying destination in destination
guidance system
1. Select the desired destination and press
the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination in the desti-
nation list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> Store entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> Display information on destination:
Select "Information on destination".
> Delete entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> Delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination
guidance is switched off.
> Change entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination via town/city name,
page 123.
3. Press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 129 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter name and address, also refer to
Entering a destination manually, page 122.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, refer to
page 129.
Storing current position*
The current position can be adopted into the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 122.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position into the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 130 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
To start the destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 122.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Delete data" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 131 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
Storing home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the desti-
nation guidance, and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Adopting home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 122.
Selecting route
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD.
As a result, the routes recommended by the
navigation system may not always be the same
ones that you would choose based on personal
experience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority
> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible
> "Fast route"
The short traveling time, being a combi-
nation of the shortest possible route and
the fastest roads
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be
ba8_m5us.book Seite 132 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
*
Automatic changing of the route in case
of traffic obstructions. Depending on the
road type and the type and length of the
traffic congestion, the route can also be
calculated so that it passes through the
traffic congestion.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map view:
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
Word matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing
checks, comparing your destination entries
with the data stored on the navigation DVD as
the basis for instant response. The user bene-
fits include:
> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another coun-
try.
Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
non existent names and addresses.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 133 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
134
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Via iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
2. Select a destination from the destination list
and press the controller or enter a new des-
tination, refer to page 122.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
If the route criteria "Avoid highways",
"Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, the calculation time for the route can
increase considerably.<
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment via iDrive at any time. You will
be punctually notified of a change of direction
by spoken instructions and the display of the
direction arrow.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
Press the ... button on which the
desired destination is stored. Also refer to
page 22.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 134 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
In destination list
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con-
troller.
When you park the vehicle before reaching the
entered destination, the following question is
displayed before beginning the next trip:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start the destination guidance:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Displaying route
You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Manually displaying traffic information
*
3 Selecting route criteria
4 Starting/ending destination guidance
5 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view
6 Distance to the next change of direction
7 Current position
8 Direction of travel
> Outline arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route.
> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a multi-level
parking lot.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 135 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
136
Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destina-
tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change in direction, the representation
of the arrow changes.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance up to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/ending destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Display the menu in which the information
last selected can be displayed/hidden, refer
to Selecting destination via information on
page 128
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Manually displaying traffic information
*
8 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north or toward your current direc-
tion of travel. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or
greater, the map always points toward north.
Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map display is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 136 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Displaying streets and towns/cities of
route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual road are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on and off at
any time:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use
*
.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 137 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
138
Repeating and canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable button on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 49:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press button longer.
Setting volume of voice instructions
The volume can only be adjusted while a voice
instruction is being output.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Bypassing route sections
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In population centers you can display traffic
information from radio stations that transmit
information of the Traffic Info traffic warning
service. This information of the traffic warning
services is constantly updated using measuring
data from traffic routing centers and information
from traffic congestion indicators.
During destination guidance the traffic informa-
tion located near you on the route is automati-
cally displayed. Regardless of whether the des-
tination guidance is active, you can display the
traffic information in the map view or in a list.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 138 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the strongest reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Manually displaying traffic information
During destination guidance
Traffic information can be displayed manually
during destination guidance in the arrow or map
view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf-
fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation on the planned route is marked with a
yellow lozenge.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 139 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Depiction of traffic information in map
view
The traffic information symbols are shown in
the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
With a scale of up to 5 miles/10 km, additional
information is displayed. The length, direction
and effect of a traffic obstruction are indicated
with arrows along the route, e.g.
Along planned route
Colored symbol with the traffic obstruction
symbol.
Outside planned route
> Map scale up to 5 miles/10 km:
White symbol with black or gray border with
the traffic obstruction symbol
> Map scale from 10 miles/20 km:
White symbol with black border and an
arrow in the direction concerned
Traffic event with map scales greater
than 5miles/10km, arrow points in
the direction of travel concerned.
Several traffic events have been
received. Select a smaller scale to
display these individually.
Slow traffic or other event
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Traffic event in both directions of
travel
ba8_m5us.book Seite 140 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic information during destination
guidance
The system behavior varies depending on
whether "Dynamic route" is selected.
Displaying traffic obstructions
If a traffic obstruction is reported to the naviga-
tion system and "Dynamic route" is not
selected, you will be provided with certain infor-
mation from a distance of approx. 25 miles/
40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic congestion.
The last possible junction will be displayed
shortly before this.
Select "Detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system determines a new route
to bypass the traffic congestion.
This information is also displayed if you have
called up a different application on the Control
Display.
Hiding traffic obstructions
If "Dynamic route" is selected, the route in case
of traffic obstructions is automatically changed.
The system does not point out traffic obstruc-
tions along the original route.
Depending on the road type and the type and
length of the traffic congestion, the route can
also be calculated so that it passes through the
traffic congestion.
Symbols for traffic information
Traffic light failure
Roadwork
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriage way
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road close
Slow traffic
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
ba8_m5us.book Seite 141 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is
switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town/city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 136.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 142 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-
tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-
trol Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This infor-
mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your position is not yet avail-
able on your navigation DVD, or the system
is in the process of calculating your posi-
tion. Reception is best when you have an
unobstructed view to the sky.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guid-
ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 143 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 144 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD and external audio
devices, as well as their tone settings are
described in this chapter.
Entertainment
ba8_m5us.book Seite 145 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
On/off and tone
146
On/off and tone
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Professional
*
radio or
Business radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons in the area of the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons, refer to page 21
Buttons in area of CD player
The layout of the buttons can vary depending
on your vehicle's equipment.
One drive:
Two drives:
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on, the last set radio
station or CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVDs
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
> "CD": CD player or CD changer
> "AUX": AUX-In connection
> USB/audio interface
*
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
ba8_m5us.book Seite 146 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
From radio readiness, the selected audio
source is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output on
and off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
For a single drive, the sound output is available
for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition
switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this pur-
pose.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
From radio readiness, the setting is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
From radio readiness, the settings are stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.
Treble and bass
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Treble / Bass" is selected
and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 147 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
On/off and tone
148
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Individual high-end sound system*
You can choose between Stereo and Surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
3. Press the controller.
The spatial sound effect is activated.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 148 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To cancel the spatial sound effect:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Reset" is selected and
press the controller.
With two drives: select "Yes".
ba8_m5us.book Seite 149 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
150
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to radio
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-
sets".
If "Autostore" does not display any stations or
if the stations displayed can no longer be
received, to update the station with the stron-
gest signal, refer to page 152.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
Professional radio*
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 152.
Business radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "Autostore":
For the Station with the strongest signal,
refer to page 152.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 152.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 150 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 152.
> "Manual":
Set stations that are received in addition to
those displayed.
1. Change into the second field from the top.
2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
Buttons next to CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change stations with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Sampling stations, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current wave-
band.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Buttons next to CD player
To sample the stations, press and hold the but-
ton for the corresponding direction.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that are
received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 151 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
152
Updating stations with best reception
For Professional radio with "AM" and Business
radio:
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 152 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The stations of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
From radio readiness, the stations are stored
for the remote control currently in use.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
You can also store a station on the programma-
ble memory/direct selection buttons, also refer
to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press and hold desired but-
ton.
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System
In the FM frequency range, additional informa-
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Automatically sorting
stations*
For the "All stations" selection criterion, you
can set whether the most frequently used sta-
tions are displayed at the beginning.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 153 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
154
1. Select "All stations" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.
The most frequently used stations are
shown at the beginning.
Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to
3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most
stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a
storm, the National Weather Service interrupts
the routine weather news and transmits special
warning messages instead. If you have a ques-
tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con-
tact the nearest office of the National Weather
Service. Details are also provided on the Inter-
net at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.
2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and with improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available in
order to receive digital stations
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field. Turn the controller
until "HD radio" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is deac-
tivated.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 154 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig-
nals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
playback changes between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or inter-
ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.
Selecting programs of a digital station*
Some stations transmit several programs.
To select one of these programs:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that is received digitally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is being received digitally.
4. Switch to the next program of the dig-
ital station with the buttons on the radio or
the steering wheel.
Updating stations offering digital
reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to 2 min-
utes.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 155 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
156
Displaying additional information
With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interrup-
tion.
Satellite radio*
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
Enabling or disabling channels
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channels:
Dial the phone number.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 156 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required for disabling.<
3. To disable the channels:
Dial the phone number.
Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels are shown on the Control Display
sorted on the basis of selection criteria.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by categories, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 157 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Radio
158
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing channel
1. Select desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed once again
after a short time.
Changing channel with buttons next to
CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If no signal can be received for more than 4 sec-
onds, a message is displayed on the Control
Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 158 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can
be played by the CD player, but not by the CD
changer.
CD player: starting CD
With two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Inserting CD
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. The CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the
data depending on the directory structure.
Via iDrive
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
4. With a CD changer, change to the second
field from the top and turn the controller
until "CD" is selected and press the control-
ler.
The CD player is started.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
You can store the function CD player on the
programmable memory/direct selection but-
tons to start the CD player, refer to page 21.
Eject CD
Press the button next to CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
*
ba8_m5us.book Seite 159 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
160
CD changer: starting CD
Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to
page 163.
Via iDrive
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until the
desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press
the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
If the CD magazine has been newly filled, play-
back begins with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1,
track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on the programmable memory/direct
selection buttons to start the CD changer, refer
to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons next to CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
The CD will start play at the start of the track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 160 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can store a certain track on the program-
mable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to
page 21.
Displaying information on track*
With compressed audio files, you can display
any information stored on the current track, e.g.
the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information for the current track are dis-
played.
From radio readiness, the setting is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the
player remains on the current track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 161 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
162
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
This cancels sampling, and the player remains
on the current track.
Repeating a track
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 162 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random direc-
tory" and press the controller.
> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
To stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons next to CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:
Press button 2, the CD magazine 1 is ejected.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs into/from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them by their edges, taking care to avoid
touching the data side with its reflective CD
memory surface.
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting CD magazine
Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 163 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
164
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat buildup and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles, as other-
wise the CD/DVD or the adapter can jam and
may no longer eject properly.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/50 6, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 164 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
AUX-In connection
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-
cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted
via iDrive.
Connecting
1 Connection for audio playback:
1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug
To play audio tracks through the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the headset or line-
out port of the external device to connection 1.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "AUX" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
You can save the function audio AUX on the
programmable memory/direct selection but-
tons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 165 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
USB/audio interface
166
USB/audio interface
You can connect audio devices to the USB/
audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device
(MP3 player, USB memory stick). You can then
operate these with iDrive.
The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and ACC, as well as playback lists in the
M3U format can be played back.
Due to the large number of audio devices avail-
able on the market, operation via the vehicle
cannot be ensured for every audio device.
Ask your BMW center which audio devices are
suitable.
Connecting
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio playback:
1/8 in/3.5 mm jack plug
iPod
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak-
ers, connect the iPod to the connections 1
and 2.
Use an iPod adapter cable to connect the iPod.
The menu structure of the iPod is supported by
the USB/audio interface.
USB storage medium
Use a flexible adapter cable for connec-
tion to protect the USB interface and your
USB device against mechanical damage.<
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak-
ers, connect the USB device to the connec-
tion 1.
After connecting for the first time, the informa-
tion of all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) and
the playback lists of the USB device are trans-
ferred to the vehicle. This process can take
some time. The time required is dependent on
the USB device and on the number of tracks.
During the transfer you can select the tracks via
the directories and file names.
Following the transfer you can call up the tracks
via the information and playback lists.
The information of up to four USB devices can
be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx.
20,000 tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected, the informa-
tion of the tracks of the first USB device stored
in the vehicle is deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
*
ba8_m5us.book Seite 166 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio
device and press the controller.
5. The playback starts with the first track.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
You can save the function "USB" on the pro-
grammable memory/direct selection buttons to
start audio playback, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up the tracks via the file directory.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-
ists", and press the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information on track
You can display any information stored on the
current track, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information for the current track are dis-
played.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 167 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
USB/audio interface
168
Repeating a track
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Random play sequence
You can play back the tracks of the selected list
in random order, e.g. all tracks of an artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
End random playback:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons next to CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
> The USB/audio interface supplies the con-
nected audio device with power, provided
the audio device supports this function.
Therefore, do not connect the audio device
to a socket in the vehicle during operation.
> Do not subject the audio devices to extreme
environmental conditions, e.g. extremely
high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device.
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB/audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Depending on the configuration of the
audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than
256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always
be ensured.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 168 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 170 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.
Communications
ba8_m5us.book Seite 171 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
172
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone in the vehicle once, you can oper-
ate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the buttons
on the steering wheel and by voice.
A mobile phone that has been paired once is
automatically detected again with the engine
running or the ignition switched on as soon as
it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up
to four mobile phones can be stored simulta-
neously. If several mobile phones are detected
simultaneously, the respective last mobile
phone paired can be operated via the vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-
ter which mobile phones snap-in adapters are
offered for.
BMW discourages the use of mobile
phones or other mobile communications
devices inside the vehicle without a direct con-
nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can influence one another. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation which
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones snap-in adapters are available
for. These mobile phones support the functions
described in this Owner's Manual with a certain
software version. Malfunctions can occur with
other mobile phones.
Care instructions
You can find what you need to know about car-
ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
*
using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 183
> Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons, refer to page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by
the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile
phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.
*
ba8_m5us.book Seite 172 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
173
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Placing phone calls with BMW Assist
system*: BMW Assist calls
You can use the BMW Assist system via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-
tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist or
while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must log off the
mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Commissioning
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is
supported by the full mobile phone prepara-
tion package. Information on this subject is
also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to
page 177, and on the mobile phone is
active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, preset-
tings on the mobile phone are necessary:
e.g. via the following menu items:
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection not with confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for exam-
ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> For pairing, specify any desired number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required follow-
ing successful pairing.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only log on the mobile phone with the
vehicle stopped, otherwise the passen-
gers and other road users can be endangered
due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/
Stop button without depressing the brake
or clutch pedal.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
3. Press the button to open the start
menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 173 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
174
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
7. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con-
troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control-
ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation with mobile phone
10. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-
nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The
Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also shown
on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey you specified.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
13. Change into the third field from the top,
select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 174 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
175
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
14. Wait a few seconds until the "Communica-
tion" menu appears.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max-
imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
With some mobile phone models it may
be necessary to make certain settings for
a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. via the menu
item Authorization or Secure connection. Refer
to the operating instructions of your mobile
phone.<
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to your vehicle. This transmission is depen-
dent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat-
ing instructions of your mobile phone if
necessary, and can take several minutes.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec-
utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the
pairing data of the mobile phone for which the
pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will
be deleted.
Check if pairing is unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor-
mation on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected to the mobile phone. Delete the
connection to other devices if necessary.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con-
troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact
the BMW Hotline.
To call the BMW Hotline:
Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number of the BMW Hotline and
information required for pairing is shown on the
display. With mobile phones already paired, you
can select the phone number of the BMW Hot-
line to establish the connection.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 175 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
176
List of paired mobile phones
The mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the pairing data can be displayed. If sev-
eral paired mobile phones are detected by the
vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi-
cle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper-
ated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
into the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone is moved
upward by one position.
Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle
If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone
via the vehicle, you can delete the pairing data
of the mobile phone.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to open the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
into the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 176 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com-
puter.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Remove the mobile phone from the cradle
and switch it off.
2. Press the button to open the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Settings" and press the controller.
7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 177 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
178
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Accepting/refusing a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls.
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after removing the remote
control from the ignition lock, you can continue
an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to cannot under-
stand you well, this may be due to excessively
loud background noises. The full mobile phone
preparation package can compensate for these
noises to a certain degree. To optimize the
speech quality during a call, we recommend
that you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing the air volume of the
automatic climate control or pointing the
opened front vent outlets downward
> Reduce volume of hands-free system
Requirements
> The logon data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi-
cle.
Opening Communication
You operate many of the functions described in
the following via the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Move the controller forward to open "Com-
munication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 178 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Alternative:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the con-
troller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller toward the right to
select the arrow and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Alternative:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are calling, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your service pro-
vider.
With programmable memory/direct
selection buttons
You can store phone numbers on and call them
up with the programmable memory/direct
selection buttons, refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 179 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
180
2. "End call" is selected:
Press the controller.
Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is dis-
played instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.
Dialing a phone number from phone
book
The list "A - Z" is available for your phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 180 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting individual entries
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If you are not enabled for BMW Assist, you can
have several service phone numbers displayed:
> Roadside Assistance
*
of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance
> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make
an appointment for service
> BMW Customer Relations
*
for information
on all aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 187.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 181 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
182
You can dial the displayed service phone num-
bers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehi-
cle:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.
Transmitting phone number via tone
dialing method
The tone dialing method is required for access
to network services or for controlling devices,
e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.
This function is available when a connection
has been established.
1. Establish connection.
2. With a single drive:
Press the controller.
Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
With two drives:
Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired character
and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending on the
mobile phone model.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 182 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free
system when the motor is running or the igni-
tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile
phone, the system automatically changes over
to the hands-free mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
change over to the hands-free mode:
> Depending on the mobile phone model
used, the conversation can be continued via
the hands-free system if necessary. Act
according to what is shown on the mobile
phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment. Changing over may take sev-
eral seconds.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the hands-free system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue-
tooth link.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications net-
work can result in the system changing from the
hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements or questions in
many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 178.
Voice commands
Activating system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,
e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the
button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 183 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
184
Example: dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting volume of instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the knob during instructions.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a per-
sonal voice phone book.
> With combined drives for audio CDs and
navigation DVDs, the entries are automati-
cally adopted from your mobile phone's
memory.
> With a single drive, the entries must be
entered by voice and are independent of
your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it
is not possible to use voice command either
to call phone numbers stored in the mobile
phone or to store new numbers.
You say The voice control answers
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 184 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Creating and editing voice phone
book*
Store entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Have entries read aloud and select:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command calls "Redial".
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-
mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambi-
ent noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Mounting/removing snap-in
adapter
1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover.
1. {Save name}.
2. Speak the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Speak the phone number after being
requested to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 185 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
186
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press the area 1 around the button.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged from
radio readiness or with the steering unlocked.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press button.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 186 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an emergency call
*
has
been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys-
tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser-
vice will be available. The BMW Assist system
can be reactivated by a BMW center after sign-
ing a new contract.
Requirements
You can use BMW Assist when the following
requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> A GPS signal must be available in order for
BMW Assist to be activated and updated.
> You have placed an order for the BMW
Assist service contract at a BMW center or
BMW Assist Response Center and signed
the service contract. Activation must be
completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 192.
Services offered
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
> Emergency call, refer to page 219:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and
arranges for further steps to help you.
> Automatic emergency call:
Under certain conditions, a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center immediately after a serious acci-
dent. If possible, the BMW Assist Response
Center contacts you and takes further steps
to help you.
> Roadside Assistance:
You can call Roadside Assistance
*
of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehi-
cle data and position data are transmitted
during this time.
> BMW Customer Relations:
For information related to your vehicle, call
the BMW Customer Relations.
> TeleService:
Data on your vehicle's service status or nec-
essary inspections are transmitted to your
BMW center either automatically before a
service due date or when you request a
BMW service appointment.
> Unlocking vehicle:
Inform the BMW Assist Response Center,
e.g. if your remote control is not available
and you want to have the vehicle unlocked.
> Vehicle search:
After your vehicle has been reported to the
police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response
Center can locate its position. To do this,
the vehicle electronics must be ready for
operation.
*
ba8_m5us.book Seite 187 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
188
In addition, you can be provided with other ser-
vices, e.g. the information service or informa-
tion on route planning, the traffic situation and
the weather.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center, see below.
You also have access to the BMW Assist infor-
mation service via the Internet.
Special features of the services offered
The following special features apply to the ser-
vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transmitted, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can, for example, be
the vehicle data, your current position or the
data of the CBS Condition Based Service.
Using services
Contacting BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center with the SOS button.
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center is con-
tacted.
Breakdown assistance
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the location can be determined, the cur-
rent vehicle position is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 188 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you to the Roadside Assistance of the
BMW Group.
TeleService
Automatic service notification*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on necessary inspections are transmitted auto-
matically prior to the due date. You can check
when the BMW center was notified.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Service notification" and press the
controller.
Manual service notification
You can transmit data on the maintenance state
of your vehicle to your BMW center if you want
to make an appointment for service.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Service Request".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 189 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
190
The data relevant for service are transmitted.
Your BMW center will contact you to set up an
appointment for service.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For information on all aspects of your vehicle,
you can contact the BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
You will be connected to the BMW Customer
Relations by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Information service*
When you call the information service of
BMW Assist, you can, for example, obtain infor-
mation on current events, filling stations or
hotels and have their phone numbers and
addresses transmitted. Reservations can be
made at many hotels directly by the BMW infor-
mation service.
The information service must be enabled sepa-
rately by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling up information
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Start Service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you to the information service.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 190 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Displaying transmitted data
Select the received message if necessary and
press the controller.
Dialing phone number or adopting
address in destination guidance
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> With "Call" you can establish a telephone
connection. This requires your Bluetooth
mobile phone to be paired in the vehicle.
> With "Select as destination" you can adopt
the address in the destination guidance of
the navigation system.
Updating BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
You will be notified of any changes in the ser-
vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case you
should update the services.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
The current services of BMW Assist are dis-
played.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 191 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
192
Blocking services*
If you block the services, the connection to
BMW Assist is deactivated.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.
The use of BMW Assist is blocked, and the cur-
rent vehicle position will not be transmitted dur-
ing an emergency call
*
. To cancel blocking and
reactivate BMW Assist, see below. This does
not affect the contractual agreements.
Reactivate BMW Assist if necessary to log on
again.
Activating BMW Assist
For you to be able to use the services of BMW
Assist, BMW Assist must be activated.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave radio readiness switched on while
connecting to the system.
Activating
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 192 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
BMW Assist is enabled and the data
exchange with the BMW Assist Response
Center begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. The status is
displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
to run in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is activated, the license
plate and the vehicle identification number of
your vehicle can be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Profile" is selected and
press the controller.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 193 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 194 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance
and breakdown assistance.
Mobility
ba8_m5us.book Seite 195 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Refueling
196
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling,
otherwise no fuel can be filled into the
tank and a message is displayed.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-
tainers in the vehicle. These could become
leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an acci-
dent.<
Fuel filler door
To open and close: press the rear edge of the
fuel filler door.
Manual release
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the fuel filler door manually.
1. In the cargo bay, raise the floor mat and the
cover located beneath it.
2. Open the snap fasteners of the right side
panel and take off the side panel.
3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels always observe any
safety guidelines posted at the service
station.<
Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to
> premature pump shutoff
> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx.4 US gal/15 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel filler cap
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel
filler cap between the fuel filler cap and
the vehicle. A message
*
is displayed if the cap
is loose or missing.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 196 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
197
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
permanent damage to the catalytic con-
verter will result.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys-
tem will result.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93
Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain
maximum fuel economy and performance.
The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 197 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
198
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct if necessary, including on the
spare wheel
*
: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. Otherwise driving instability
or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can
result from incorrect tire inflation pressures. Do
not drive with a depressurized, i.e. flat, tire. A flat
tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling
and braking response. Attempts to drive on a
flat tire can lead to a loss of control over the
vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 82, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 84.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
> Tire sizes of your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column Traveling speeds up to max. 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam-
age and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures
for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages. Oth-
erwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 198 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
199
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
Q= up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Z = over 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT... 3406 indicates that the
tire was manufactured in week 34 of 2006.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years. This also concerns the tire of the
spare wheel.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 100 V XL M+S 35/240 38/260 35/240 38/260 41/280 46/320
255/40 ZR 19 36/250 - 36/250 - 41/280 -
285/35 ZR 19 - 36/250 - 36/250 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 228.
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)
245/45 R
18
100 V
285/35 ZR
19
e.g.
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 3406
ba8_m5us.book Seite 199 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
200
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of
safety, new tires should be installed.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 200 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-
ference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there. Tire damage can
be extremely dangerous for vehicle occupants
and other road users.<
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend that you use
retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possi-
bly different tire casing structures and the often
wide variations in their age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. When selecting the tires, also ensure
that they have a sufficient load-carrying capac-
ity. If non-approved wheels and tires are used,
BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and
therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects
various systems whose function would other-
wise be impaired, e.g. ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 83. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 201 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
202
Recommended tire brands
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
After changing wheels/tires
After changing tires or wheels, the slip detec-
tion of the Sequential Manual Transmission
must become familiar with the changed state.
Reinitialize the system for this purpose:
1. Move the selector lever into the idling
position N on a straight stretch of road at a
speed between 20 mph/30 km/h and
90 mph/150 km/h.
2. Pull both shift paddles for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
If you do not carry out initialization, the system
will automatically learn the changed state grad-
ually during driving. This may be noticeable
from the clutch opening and closing briefly.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles
BMW does not recommend moving the front
wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise
the handling characteristics may be impaired.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-
mation.
Use is only permitted in pairs, with winter tires
of the size 245/45 R 18 on the rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf-
ficiently tensioned. Retension in accordance
with the chain manufacturer's specifications if
necessary.
After mounting snow chains, do not ini-
tialize the Flat Tire Monitor, otherwise
incorrect displays can occur.
After mounting or removing snow chains, the
slip detection of the Sequential Manual Trans-
mission must become familiar with the altered
state. To do this, reinitialize the system, refer to
After changing wheels/tires.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 202 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training.
If you do not know what repair procedures to
follow, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
You cannot start off with the hood open.<
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 203 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Under the hood
204
Engine compartment
1 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil, page 205
2 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 206
3 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 220
4 Body ground/negative terminal
5 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning system, refer to
page 63
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check. You can display the oil level in the
instrument cluster.
1 Oil level
2 Maximum marking
3 Minimum marking
Press the BC button on the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the oil level display is shown in
the instrument cluster. The displayed numeric
ba8_m5us.book Seite 204 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
value indicates the current oil level in liters
above Minimum.
After starting the engine, the last determined
value is displayed.
The oil level must be between the two marks.
Manual transmission: the engine oil level
will be shown in the lower display.<
Exact measurement
The oil level is measured continuously while
driving or when stopped with the engine run-
ning.
The determination of a new value can take
30 minutes or longer.
If only dashes are shown in the display,
it was not possible to determine a new
value. This can, for example, be the case when
driving short distances or with a sporty driving
style.<
Fast measurement
In addition to the continuous measurement, you
can also quickly determine the current oil level,
e.g. after adding engine oil, however with a low
measuring accuracy.
1. With the engine at operating temperature,
i.e. after at least 6 miles/10 km of uninter-
rupted driving, park the vehicle in a horizon-
tal position.
2. Allow the engine to run at idle.
3. Press the BC button on the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the oil level display is
shown in the instrument cluster.
4. Press the BC button on the turn signal lever
for at least 2 seconds.
The oil level is determined. A clock symbol
is displayed during the measurement.
5. After approx. 1 minute the current oil level is
displayed.
If not all measuring conditions are met,
e.g. with the engine cold, "-.-" is dis-
played. The requested measurement is carried
out as soon as possible.<
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level at minimum:
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of
engine oil at the next opportunity, refer to
Adding engine oil below
3 Oil level too high
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
4 Oil level at maximum
5 Fast measurement running: oil level is being
determined
6 No value can be determined at this time
Adding engine oil
Do not add oil until a value slightly above the
minimum of 0.0 US quarts/liters is displayed by
the oil level measurement. In this area a mes-
sage is also shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of oil, oth-
erwise the engine may be damaged by adding
too much oil.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 205 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Under the hood
206
Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liter of oil, other-
wise the oil level check cannot reliably display
the current oil level.<
Please conduct a fast measurement after
adding engine oil to check the oil quantity
added and to update the display.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come into
contact with oil should be thoroughly washed
with soap and water.
Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and
observe the warnings on the containers to pre-
vent health risks.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or
at a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives, as these may
result in engine damage.<
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.
Approved oils belong to the SAE grade
10W-60.<
Alternative oil grades
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes.
Only use oils with the following specifications:
> Viscosity
preferred: SAE 10W-60;
alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or
SAE 10W-50
> Specification
API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher
Low ambient temperatures
The oils used by BMW from the factory for your
vehicle model can be used at virtually all ambi-
ent temperatures. However, if the vehicle is
operated for a longer period at temperatures
below –47/–206, your BMW center will be
happy to recommend a suitable oil.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant is comprised of water and coolant addi-
tive. Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center
for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instruc-
tions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Allow the engine to cool.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 206 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. The coolant level is correct when the upper
end of the float rod is at the same height as
the upper edge of the filler neck, also refer
to the drawing next to the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 207 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Maintenance
208
Maintenance
BMW maintenance system
The BMW maintenance system supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete dealer service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 68:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser-
vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 75, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 208 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located to the left on the driver's
side, on the underside of the instrument panel
under a cover.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up. The
exhaust-gas values worsen. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system will assume that
fuel vapor escapes. Then a display lights up. If
the cap is then tightened, the display will go out
within a few days.<
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also
signed a contract of participation for BMW
Assist, certain vehicle data can be transmitted
or recorded to enable corresponding services.
Care
Important information on the care and mainte-
nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 209 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
210
Replacing components
Onboard toolkit
The onboard toolkit is located in the luggage
compartment lid.
Loosen the wing nut to open.
Wiper blade replacement
1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly.
2. Press the safety tabs together while sliding
the wiper blade toward the front to disen-
gage it.
3. Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until
it is heard to engage.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. BMW recommends having
your BMW center perform any work that you do
not feel competent to perform yourself or that is
not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
Only replace bulbs when cool, as other-
wise you may be burned.<
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits
from occurring. To avoid possible injury or
equipment damage when replacing bulbs,
observe any instructions provided by the bulb
manufacturer.<
For care and maintenance of the headlamps,
please follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 210 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Xenon lamps
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times.
Have work on the xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Access to lamps
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
engine compartment.
1 Cover cap for parking and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
2 Sealing cap for turning lamps
*
To remove the covers:
> Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps,
daytime running lamps: turn the cover cap
to the left and remove.
> Turning lamps: turn the sealing cap to the
left and remove.
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Turn the bulb in the direction of the arrow, in
the opposite direction on the other side,
and remove.
2. Remove the connector and replace the
bulb.
Turning lamps*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Remove the sealing cap, refer to Access to
lamps.
2. Push the locking bar to the side out of the
anchor and fold upward.
3. Remove the connector and take out the
bulb.
4. Replace the bulb and reinstall.
5. Fold down the locking bar and engage it.
6. Reconnect the connector.
7. Mount the sealing cap. Watch the markings
on the bulb when doing so.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 211 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
212
Turn signals, front
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
2. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Side-mounted turn signals
5-watt bulb, W5W
1. Press back against the front edge of the
lamp with the tip of your finger, then pivot it
out.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove the bulb for replacement.
Side marker lamps, front and rear
To replace, please go to your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
Tail lamps
> Turn signals 1, tail lamps 6 and side marker
lamps 7 are designed using LED technol-
ogy. In the event of a malfunction, please go
to your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
> Backup lamps: 16-watt bulb, W16W
> Other lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lamp and brake lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Brake lamp
5 Reflector
6 Tail lamp
7 Side marker lamp
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please go to your
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond-
ingly trained personnel.
Fender-mounted lamps
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
cargo bay.
All the bulbs are integrated into a central bulb
fitting.
1. Lift up floor mat.
2. Undo the quick-release fasteners of the
side panel and pull out the panel.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 212 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. Turn the lock to the left and remove the bulb
holder.
4. Backup lamps:
Remove and replace the bulb.
Other lamps:
Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Lamps in luggage compartment lid
License plate lamp
5-watt bulb, C5W
1. Insert screwdriver into the slot and press to
the right, refer to arrows. This releases the
lamp.
2. Remove the lamp and replace the bulb.
Repairing flat tire with
M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire, an M Mobility System is pro-
vided in the BMW M5. Using this system you
can apply a sealant in the inside of the tire, seal
off the damaged area, restore the tire inflation
pressure and then continue driving.
Safety measures in case of a breakdown:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on
the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the handbrake and engage the first or
reverse gear. Have all vehicle occupants get out
of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place, such as
behind a guardrail.
If a warning triangle
*
or portable hazard warning
lamp
*
is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.<
Preparation
The M Mobility System is located in the cargo
bay under the floor panel flap.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have pen-
etrated the tire if possible.
Corresponding information on using the
M Mobility System are also provided on
the device.<
Before using the M Mobility System,
observe the information on the sealant
bottle.<
Pull the sticker for the speed limit off the sealant
bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 213 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
214
Please observe the best-by date on the
sealant bottle.<
The M Mobility System consists of
1 Sealant bottle and sticker with speed limit
2 Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel
Model with pressure gauge on hose*
3 Connector and cable for lighter socket
4 Mounting for sealing bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/Off switch
7 Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation
pressure
8 Screw on pressure gauge for reducing tire
inflation pressure
9 Connecting hose for connecting compres-
sor and sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connector, cable and connecting hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Model with pressure gauge integrated
in housing*
3 Connector and cable for lighter socket
4 Mounting for sealing bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/Off switch
7 Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation
pressure
8 Button for reducing tire inflation pressure
9 Connecting hose for connecting compres-
sor and sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connector, cable and connecting hose are
stored on underside of compressor.
Using M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
> Fill sealant into wheel, refer to page 214.
> Distribute sealant, refer to page 215.
> Produce tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 215.
Filling sealant into wheel
Strictly comply with the specified order,
otherwise highly pressurized sealant
could escape.<
1. Shake sealant bottle.
2. Screw hose 9 onto connection of sealant
bottle.
3. For model with pressure gauge on hose:
Make sure that screw 8 on pressure gauge
is closed.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 214 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4. Screw dust cap off valve of defective wheel
and screw filling hose 2 of sealant bottle
onto valve.
5. Insert sealant bottle on compressor hous-
ing so that it is positioned upright.
6. Make sure that the device is switched off,
position 0.
7. Insert connector 3 into lighter socket in
vehicle interior, refer to page 106.
8. With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the device and allow to run for
approx. 3 minutes to fill wheel with sealant.
It is not important what inflation pressure
the tire has after filling.
9. Switch off device.
10. Remove connecting hose from connection
of sealant bottle and tire valve.
Stow the M Mobility System in the vehicle
again.
Distributing sealant
Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km so that
sealant is evenly distributed in tire.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of
35 mph/60 km/h. Do not drop below
12 mph/20 km/h if possible.<
Producing tire inflation pressure
1. After approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at suitable
location.
2. Screw compressor hose 9 directly onto tire
valve.
3. Insert connector 3 in lighter socket in vehi-
cle interior.
4. Correct tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/
200 kPa. With the ignition switched on:
> Increase inflation pressure: switch on
compressor, position I. To check cur-
rently set inflation pressure, briefly
switch off device.
Do not allow compressor to run
longer than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may be dam-
aged.<
> Reduce inflation pressure: press
button 8 or turn screw 8 on pressure
gauge.
If the inflation pressure is not held, drive
the vehicle again, refer to Distributing
sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once.
Using the M Mobility System can be ineffective
with tire damage from a size of approx. 0.16 in/
4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center,
refer to page 220, or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel if the tire can-
not be made ready for driving with the
M Mobility System.<
The tire inflation pressure must be at least
29 psi/200 kPa. Otherwise do not con-
tinue driving.<
Continue driving
Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise
accidents can occur.<
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
For details, refer to page 82.
Have the defective tire and the sealant bottle of
the M Mobility System replaced as soon as
possible.<
Changing wheels*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the handbrake and engage first gear or
reverse gear with a manual transmission, or
ba8_m5us.book Seite 215 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
216
select a drive position with the selector level for
a sequential transmission.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the imme-
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle
*
or portable hazard warning
lamp
*
is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi-
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com-
pleting work.
1 Chock
*
2 Vehicle jack
*
3 Lug wrench
*
The tools are located in the hollow of the spare
wheel.
Spare wheel*
1. Pull back lock 1, fold open tensioning lock 2
completely and loosen the belt 3.
2. Remove the cover 4.
3. Remove the tool mount form the spare tire
and stow the belt in the net bag included if
necessary.
4. Remove the spare wheel.
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Prevent the vehicle from rolling:
Place the chock behind the front wheel on
the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines,
in front of this wheel. On steeply inclined
roads, always secure the vehicle against
rolling.
3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-
face of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 216 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or spare wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genu-
ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the speci-
fied torque. The tightening torque is
88.5 lb ft/120 Nm.<
2. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve stem
seal caps against dirt and contamina-
tion. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source
of gradual air loss.<
3. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 82, and the Sequential Manual Trans-
mission, refer to After changing wheels/
tires on page 202.
4. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi-
ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Stowing wheel and tools
1. Lay the wheel in the tool mounting.
2. Lay the cover on the mounting.
3. Center the wheel and cover relative to the
lashing eyes 5.
4. Hook the belt into the lashing eyes 5.
5. Completely open the tensioning lock.
6. Thread the belt 3 through the axis 6 of the
tensioning lock without twisting it and ten-
sion it by hand.
7. Tighten the belt firmly with the tensioning
lock by opening and closing the lock several
times.
8. Fold the tensioning lock closed and stow
the protruding belt end.
Driving with spare wheel
With certain wheel-and-tire combinations
the size of the spare wheel differs from
that of the other wheels. The spare wheel is
equivalent to them in all load and speed ranges.
However, to restore the original state, the nor-
mal wheel should be remounted as soon as
possible.<
ba8_m5us.book Seite 217 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
218
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. Connections, refer to
Jump starting on page 220.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recy-
cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping
over during transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings are also lost
and must be updated:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 43.
> Time and Date
The values must be updated, refer to
page 74.
> Radio
Stations must be stored again if necessary,
refer to page 152.
> Navigation system
Wait until the system starts, refer to
page 120.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses, plastic tweezers and fuse alloca-
tion diagram are located in the compartment for
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 210.
In glove compartment
1. Release both quick-release fasteners.
2. Fold the cover forward or remove.
in cargo bay
1. Lift up floor mat.
2. Release the quick-release fastener of the
right side panel and pull out the panel.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 218 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency call
Conditions for an emergency call:
> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency call is
still possible when no mobile phone is
paired in the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 192.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The emergency call system is operable.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, emergency calls are not
possible. The BMW Assist system be reacti-
vated by a BMW center after signing a new con-
tract.
Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist Response
Center has been established, the LED flashes.
Even if you are unable to answer, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further steps
to help you under certain conditions.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
If the current position of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW
Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an emergency call is
automatically initiated immediately after a
severe accident. The automatic emergency call
is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency call
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.<
You can also use other services of
BMW Assist with this button, refer to
page 187.<
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the luggage
compartment lid.
Loosen the wing nut to open.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 219 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
220
First-aid kit*
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.
The first-aid kit is located in the luggage com-
partment lid.
Loosen the wing nut to open.
Roadside Assistance*
The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group
offers you assistance in the event of a break-
down around the clock, including on weekends
and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
With BMW Assist you can contact the Roadside
Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in
the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,
refer to page 188.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW M5, the so-called jump-starting
terminal in the engine compartment serves as a
positive terminal for the battery, also refer to
engine compartment overview on page 204.
The cover cap is marked with a +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump-
starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 220 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a start-
ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.
Your BMW M5 has a special nut as body
ground or negative terminal.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
The screw-on tow-fitting must always be car-
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW M5.
It is located in the toolkit in the luggage com-
partment lid, refer to page 210.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral
loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi-
cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the
tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<
Access to screw thread
Press the arrow symbol on the cover in the
bumper.
Front:
Rear:
ba8_m5us.book Seite 221 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
222
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 55, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. Do not tow the
vehicle with the rear axle raised, as otherwise
the steering can turn to the left or right. When
the engine is stopped, there is no power assist.
This then requires increased effort for braking
and steering.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Make sure that selector lever position N is
engaged with the ignition switched on, as
otherwise the engine can be damaged during
towing.<
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
With tow truck
Do not tow the vehicle with only the front
or rear axle raised, as otherwise the
engine may be damaged or the steering can
turn to the left or right.<
Have the vehicle transported on a flatbed sur-
face only.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump start-
ing, refer to page 220. With a catalytic con-
verter, the vehicle should only be tow-started
with the engine cold.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 222 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Manual transmission
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Tow-start in selector lever position N.
4. Move the selector lever into the drive posi-
tion and pull toward + within 2 seconds.
The correct gear will be selected and
engaged automatically.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
ba8_m5us.book Seite 223 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 224 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.
Reference
ba8_m5us.book Seite 225 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technical data
226
Technical data
Engine data
M5
Displacement cu in/cmµ 305.1/4,999
No. of cylinders 10
Maximum output hp 500
at engine speed rpm 7,750
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 383/520
at engine speed rpm 6,100
ba8_m5us.book Seite 226 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Technical data
228
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
M5
Curb weight lbs./kg 4,012/1,820
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 5,071/2,300
Load lbs./kg 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,800/1,270
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel grade: page 197
of that reserve US gal/liters approx. 4/15
Window and headlamp
washer system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5
For more details: page 62
ba8_m5us.book Seite 228 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
229
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands of voice command
system
With short commands you can run certain func-
tions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected. Here are the important short com-
mands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 120 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To open phone 173 {Phone}
To dial phone number 179 {Dial number}
To display phone book 180 {A to Z}
To select from the phone book 180 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 181 {Top 8}
To redial 180 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 181 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 181 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 176 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 188 {BMW Assist}
To open BMW Service, Services 187 {BMW service}
To open "BMW Contact" 181 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 181 {BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 188 {Roadside Assistance}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 229 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Short commands of voice command system
230
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation system 120 {Navigation}
To open "Enter address" {Enter address}
To open "New destination" {New destination}
To display "Input map" {Input map}
To display destination list {Destination list}
To display address book {Address book}
To display route criteria {Route preference}
To start destination guidance {Start guidance}
To end destination guidance {Stop guidance}
To display arrow display {Arrow display}
To display map display {Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To change scale {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display roads or towns/cities along route {Route list}
To switch on voice instructions {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions {Repeat navigation info}
To open route {Route menu}
To open "New route" {New route}
To display current position {Current position}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 67 {Car data}
To display computer 67 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 68 {Trip computer}
To open stopwatch 73 {Stopwatch}
To open speed limit 72 {Limit}
To activate speed limit 73 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 73 {Limit off}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 230 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
231
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 147 {Audio}
To switch on radio 150 {Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 150 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 150 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 150 {FM all stations}
To select radio station 150 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC}, or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 150 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To select preset radio station 150 {Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}
To open "Manual" 151 {FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open strongest radio stations 152 {AM Autostore}
To open "WB" 154 {Weatherband menu}
To switch on weatherband 154 {Weatherband on}
To select a weatherband station 154 {Choose weatherband station}
To open "SAT" 157 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 157 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of satellite radio 158 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of satellite radio 157 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of satellite radio 157 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 159 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 159 {CD}
To open CD changer 160 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 160 {CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 160 {CD 1...6}
To select music track 160 {CD track ...}
To select a CD and music track in the CD
changer 160
{CD 1...6 track ...}
To switch on audio playback with external audio
device 165
{Audio Aux}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 231 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Short commands of voice command system
232
Climate
menu
Function Command
To adjust temperature distribution for front seat
heating 47
{Seat heater distribution}
To open "Vent settings" 97 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 96 {Automatic programs}
To open "Parked car ventilation" 100 {Parked car operation}
To open "Automatic ventilation" 100 {Automatic ventilation}
To display activation times 100 {Activation time}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 49 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open MDrive 50 {MDrive}
To open "Lighting" 62 {Lighting}
To open "Service requirements" 68, 189 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 68, 189 {Service}
To open "BMW Service settings" settings 191 {BMW service settings}
To display "Check Control messages" 71 {Check Control messages}
To open "Head-Up Display" 88 {Head-up display}
To set brightness of Control Display 75 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 75 {Units}
To open "Languages" 76, 120 {Language}
To open "Time" 74 {Time}
To open "Date" 75 {Date}
To open "PDC" 77 {PDC}
To open "FTM"
82 {FTM}
To open "TPM" 84 {TPM}
To display "Bluetooth" 176 {Bluetooth}
ba8_m5us.book Seite 232 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
234
Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 78
– indicator/warning lamp 80
Accepted calls 180
Accessories 6
Accident, refer to Emergency
call 219
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 70
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 99
"Activation time" for parked-
car ventilation 100
Active seat ventilation 47
Adapter for spare key 28
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 85
Adaptive Head Light 93
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 180
Additives
– coolant 206
– engine oil, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
"Address book" for navigation
system 130
Address for navigation
– deleting 131
– entering 122, 125
– selecting 130
– storing 130
– storing current position 130
"Add to address book" 129
"Add to destination
list" 125, 127
Adjusting active backrest
width 43
Adjusting interior
temperature 96
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 147
Adjusting thigh support 42
Adjustment in audio mode
– front/rear balance 148
– right/left balance 148
"After door opened" 44
"After unlocking" 44
Airbags 86
– indicator/warning lamp 87
– indicator lamp for front
passenger airbags 87
– sitting safely 41
Air distribution
– automatic 96
– manual 97
Airing, refer to Ventilation 99
Air recirculation
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control
98
– recirculated-air mode 98
"Air recirculation on / off" 50
Air supply, automatic climate
control 95
Air volume 97
AKI, refer to Fuel quality 197
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
– interior motion sensor 35
– switching off alarm 35
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 36
– tilt alarm sensor 35
"All channels" 157
"All doors" 31
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 202
"All stations", calling up with
radio 150, 154
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Altering stretch of road 138
"AM", reception
range 146, 150
Antenna, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Antenna for mobile phone 172
Antifreeze
– coolant 206
– washer fluid 63
Antilock Brake System
ABS 78
– indicator/warning lamp 80
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 30
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 228
Approved engine oils 206
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 228
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest, rear 107
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 67
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 134
"Arrow display" for navigation
system 135
Artificial leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
ba8_m5us.book Seite 234 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
235
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ashtray
– front 106
– rear 106
Assist, refer to
BMW Assist 187
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 78
Assistance window 20
"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 98
"Audio" 147, 149, 154
Audio 146
– controls 146
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 147
– volume 147
Audio device, external 105
Automatic
– air distribution 96
– air volume 96
– headlamp control 91
– service notification 189
– steering wheel
adjustment 43
– storing stations 152
Automatic car washes 114
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Automatic climate control 95
– automatic air distribution 96
– parked car ventilation 99
– switching on and off 99
– ventilation in rear 99
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 33
Automatic curb monitor 48
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 91
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 92
– refer to Interior lamps 94
– refer to Pathway lighting 92
– refer to Welcome lamps 91
"Automatic programs" 96
Automatic soft closing 33
Automatic station search 151
"Automatic ventilation" 100
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 96
"Autostore" on the
radio 150, 152
"AUX" 146
, 165, 167
AUX-In connection 105, 165
Average fuel consumption 67
– setting units 75
Average speed, refer to
Computer 66
"Avoid ferries" for navigation
system 133
"Avoid highways" for
navigation system 132
Avoiding freeways for
navigation 132
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
"Avoid tollroads" for
navigation system 133
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 228
"A - Z" 180
B
"Backrest:" 51
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 42
Backrests, refer to Seats 42
Backrest width 42
Back seats, refer to Rear seats
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs 212
"Balance", refer to Tone
control 148
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 220
Bass, refer to Tone
control 147
"Bass", tone control 148
Battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 218
– jump starting 220
Battery replacement, remote
control for comfort
access 37
BC button, refer to
Computer 66
Being towed 222
Belts, refer to Safety belts 45
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 105
Blind, refer to Sun blinds 103
Blower, refer to Air volume 97
"Bluetooth" 174
"BMW Assist" 188
BMW Assist 187
– activating 192
– breakdown assistance 188
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 190
– displaying vehicle data 193
– information service 190
– services offered 187
– TeleService 189
– updating 191
"BMW Contact" 182
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 182
BMW homepage 4
BMW maintenance
system 208
"BMW Service settings" 191
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 105
Bracket for telephone or
mobile phone, refer to Snap-
in adapter 185
Brake assistant 79
Brake force display 85
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs 212
– two-stage 85
Brake rotors
– breaking-in 112
– refer to Braking safely 113
ba8_m5us.book Seite 235 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
236
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 78
– brake assistant 79
– brake force display 85
– breaking-in 112
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 78
– electronic brake-force
distribution 78
– handbrake 57
– refer to Braking safely 113
– warning lamps 13
Brake system 112
– brake pads 112
– breaking-in 112
– disk brakes 114
– warning lamp 80
Braking safely 113
Breakdown, M Mobility
System 213
Breakdown assistance 188
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 220
Breaking-in brake pads 112
Breaking-in the clutch 112
Breaking-in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 112
Break-in period 112
"Brightness" 75, 89
Brightness of Control
Display 75
Button for starting engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 55
Buttons on steering wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
"Call" 180, 191
Call
– accepting 178
– displaying accepted 181
– ending 179
– in absence 181
– rejecting 179
– starting 179
Calling
– by entering phone
number 179
– from phone book 180
– from Top 8 list 181
– redialing 181
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 105
Capacities 228
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 218
Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car Data" 67
Care 209
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo
– refer to Cargo loading 114
– securing 116
– securing with ski bag 109
Cargo bay
– capacity 228
– emergency release 34
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 33
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
– socket 107
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 172
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 104
– refer to Mobile phone 172
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car radio, refer to Radio 150
Car wash 114
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 112
"Categories" 157
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 78
CBS Condition Based
Service 208
"CD" 146, 159
CD changer 159
– controls 146
– fast forward/reverse 163
– installation location 163
– random sequence 162
– repeating a track 162
– sampling tracks 161
– selecting a CD 160
– selecting a track 160
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 147
– volume 147
CD player 159
– controls 146
– fast forward/reverse 163
– random sequence 162
– repeating a track 162
– sampling a track 161
– selecting a track 160
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 147
– volume 147
ba8_m5us.book Seite 236 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
237
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Center armrest
– front 104
– rear 107
Center brake lamp 212
Center console 14
"Central locking" 30
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Central locking system 30
– comfort access 36
Changes, technical
– refer to For your own
safety 5
– refer to Parts and
accessories 6
Changing language on
Control Display 76
Changing scale for
navigation 136
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 75
Changing wheels 201, 215
CHECK button 71
Check Control 70
"Check Control
messages" 72
Check Gas Cap 196
Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation
pressure 198
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 53
Child restraint systems 52
Child-safety lock 54
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 52
Chime, refer to Check
Control 70
Chock 216
Chrome parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Cigarette lighter 106
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 107
Cleaning, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 47, 96
Clock 66
– 12h/24h mode 74
– hour signal 74
– setting time and date 74
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Closing fuel filler cap 196
Clothes hooks 105
Cockpit
10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 56
Comfort access 36
– replacing battery, remote
control 37
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Comfort operation
– glass sunroof 31
– windows 31
– windows with comfort
access 36
– with comfort access 36
"Comfort" with EDC 81
"Communication" 178, 188
Compact Disc
– refer to CD changer 159
– refer to CD player 159
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 105
Compressed audio files 159
Computer 66
– clock 66
– displays on Control
Display 67
– hour signal 74
"Concert hall", refer to Tone
control 149
"Concierge" 190
Condensation, refer to When
vehicle is parked 114
Condition Based Service
CBS 208
"Confirmation" 31
Confirmation signals for
locking and unlocking 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 107
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 67
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 67
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 135
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 75
– switching off/on 21
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Coolant 206
– checking level 206
– temperature
65
Cooling, maximum 98
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 206
Cooling function, automatic
climate control 98
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 206
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 78
Country of destination for
navigation 123
Courtesy lamps 94
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 104
Cruise control 63
Cruising range 67
Cup holders 105
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 228
"Current position" 142
Current position
– displaying 142
– entering 130
– storing 130
ba8_m5us.book Seite 237 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
238
"Customer
Relations" 182, 190
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 226
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data, technical 226
– dimensions 227
– engine 226
– weights 228
"Date" 75
Date
– display format 75
– setting 75
"Date format" 75
"Daytime running lamps" 92
Daytime running lamps 92
DBC Dynamic Brake Control,
warning lamp 81
"Deactivated" 44
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defect
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 196
– glass sunroof 39
– luggage compartment lid 34
Defrosting windows 97
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 97
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 97
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 97
"Delete address book" for
navigation system 131
"Delete all numbers" for
mobile phone 181
"Delete data" for navigation
system 131
"Delete" for mobile
phone 181
Destination address
– deleting 131
– entering 122, 125
Destination for navigation
– destination list 129
– entering via voice 125
– entry 122
– selecting from address
book 130
– selecting using
information 128
– storing 130
Destination guidance 134
– bypassing route
sections 138
– canceling voice
instructions 50
– changing specified
route 132
– displaying route 135
– distance and arrival 134
– interrupting
134
– starting 134
– terminating/continuing 134
– voice instructions 137
– volume of voice
instructions 138
Destination list for
navigation 129
Destinations recently driven
to 129
"Details" in audio
mode 161, 167
"Detour" for navigation
system 141
"Dial" for mobile phone 179
"Dial number" 179
Digital clock 66
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 154
Dimensions 227
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 61
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 137
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 137
Directory, refer to Phone
book 180
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 130
Direct selection buttons 21
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 226
"Display" 75
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display elements, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Displaying vehicle data 193
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
"Display off" 21
Displays
– on Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
"Display settings" 75, 88
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 88
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 37
– coolant 206
– vehicle battery 218
Distance, refer to
Computer 67
"Distance to dest." 67
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 67
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 77
Divided rear backrest, refer to
Through-loading
system 108
Door entry lighting 94
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Door lock 32
Door locking, confirmation
signals 31
"Door locks" 30
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 30
ba8_m5us.book Seite 238 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
239
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
DOT Quality Grades 200
Draft-free ventilation 99
Drinks holder, refer to Cup
holders 105
Drivelogic 60
Drive mode 59
"Driver's door only" 31
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 91
Driving programs, refer to
Drivelogic 60
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 135
Driving stability control
systems 78
Driving through water 113
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 112
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 98
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 98
"DSC" 51, 79
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 79
– indicator lamp 13, 79
– malfunction 80
DVD for navigation 120
"Dynamic route" for
navigation 133
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 79
– M Dynamic Mode MDM 79
E
Easy entry/exit 49
– backrest width 43
"EDC" 51
EDC Electronic Damping
Control 81
– "Comfort" 81
– "Normal" 81
– "Sport" 81
Eject button, refer to Buttons
in area of CD player 146
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 196
– glass sunroof, electric 39
– luggage compartment lid 34
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 49
Electronic brake-force
distribution 78
Electronic Damping Control
EDC 81
Emergency call 219
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 196
– luggage compartment lid 34
Emergency operation of glass
sunroof, refer to Moving
manually 39
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
cargo bay 34
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 220
"Enable services" 193
"End call" 180
Engaging driving position,
refer to Selector lever
positions 59
Engaging forward position,
refer to Selector lever
positions 59
Engine
– breaking-in 112
– data 226
– M Engine Dynamic
Control 58
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 65
– speed 226
– starting 56
– starting, with comfort
access 36
– switching off 56
Engine compartment 204
Engine coolant 206
Engine oil
– adding 205
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
– approved engine oil 206
– checking oil level 204
– exact measurement 205
– fast measurement 205
– interval between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 68
– oil change 206
– oil grades, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
– possible displays 205
– temperature 66
– temperature gauge 66
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 226
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 65
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 226
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 56
"Enter address" 122, 130
Entering destination via town/
city name 123
Entering intersection,
navigation 124
Entering the
address 122, 125
Entering town/city for
navigation 123
Entering zip code for
navigation 123
"Entertainment" 146
Entertainment sound output
on/off 147
Entry map for destination 127
"Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 149
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 149
"ESN" 157
ba8_m5us.book Seite 239 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
240
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 79
Event Data Recorders 209
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 112
Exterior mirrors 48
– adjusting 48
– automatic dimming
feature 49
– automatic heating 48
– folding in and out 48
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 48
External audio device 105
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 221
F
"Fader", refer to Tone
control 148
Fader, refer to Tone
control 148
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 70
False alarm
– refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 35
– refer to Switching off
alarm 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 45
– warning lamp 46
Fastest route for
navigation 132
"Fast route" for
navigation 132
"Favorites", calling up with
radio 154
Filler neck for washer fluid 63
Filling bottle, refer to
M Mobility System 213
Filling sealant into wheel 214
Filter, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 99
Fine wood, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 220
First-aid kit 220
Flashing
– during locking/unlocking,
refer to Setting confirmation
signals 31
– triple turn signal
activation 62
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 104
Flat tire
– changing wheels 215
– Flat Tire Monitor 81, 83
– M Mobility System 83, 213
– refer to Tire condition 200
– spare wheel 216
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 83
– warning lamp 83, 84
Flat Tire Monitor 81
– false alarms 82
– initializing system 82
– snow chains 202
– system limits 82
– warning lamp 83
Floor mat, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Floor mats/carpets, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 63
"FM", reception
range 146, 150
FM, waveband 150
Folding rear backrest 108
Fold-over rear backrest 108
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 113
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 94
Forward, fast
– CD changer 163
– CD player 163
For your own safety 5
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 132
Front airbags 86
Front armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 104
Front passenger airbags
– deactivating 86
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger seat 52
Front seat adjustment 42
"FTM" 82
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 81
Fuel 197
– average consumption 67
– display 66
– high-quality brands 197
– quality 197
– specifications 197
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 228
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Fuel consumption display,
refer to Computer, average
fuel consumption 67
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Fuel filler door 196
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 196
Full mobile phone preparation
package 172
Full screen display, refer to
Switching assistance
window off 21
Fuses 218
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 102
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 197
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
Gear changes 60
ba8_m5us.book Seite 240 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Gear display, refer to Displays
in instrument cluster 60
Gearshift lever 59
– manual transmission 57
Gearshift lever positions,
manual transmission 57
General driving notes 112
Glass sunroof, electric 38
– comfort operation from
outside 32
– comfort operation with
comfort access 36
– moving manually 39
– remote control 31
Glove compartment 103
– lighting 103
– rechargeable flashlight 104
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 120
Grills, refer to Ventilation 99
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 228
Ground clearance 114
H
Handbrake 57
– indicator lamp 13, 57
Hand lamp, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 104
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hazard warning flashers 15
"HD radio" 154
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 154
Head airbags 86
Headlamp control,
automatic 91
Headlamp flasher 61
Headlamps 91
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 62
– cleaning tank, refer to
Capacities 228
– filler neck for washer
fluid 204
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 93
Head restraints 44
– installing 45
– removing 45
– sitting safely 41
"Head-Up Display" 51, 88
Head-Up Display 88
– default view 88
– M view 88
– shift lights 61
Heated
– mirrors 48
– rear window 97
– seats 46
– steering wheel 49
Heating 95
– exterior mirrors 48
– interior 95
– rear window 97
– residual heat 98
– seats 46
– steering wheel 49
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual heat 98
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 116
Height, refer to
Dimensions 227
Height adjustment
– seats 42
– steering wheel 49
High beams 93
– headlamp flasher 93
– indicator lamp 13
High Definition Radio 154
High water, refer to Driving
through water 113
Hills 114
Holder for cups 105
"Home address" for
navigation system 132
Homepage of BMW 4
Hood 203
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 112
"Hour memo" 74
"House number" for
destination entry 125
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 79
Hydroplaning 113
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 154
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 66
ID3 tag, refer to Information on
track 161
Identification mark
– recommended tire
brands 202
– tire coding 199
Idle 59
iDrive 16
– assistance window 20
– automatic climate control
with expanded scope 96
– changing date and time 74
– changing language 76
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 73
– changing units of measure
and display type 75
– confirming selection or
entry 19
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– operating principle 17
– selecting menu item 19
– setting brightness 75
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 55
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 55
ba8_m5us.book Seite 241 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
242
Ignition lock 55
– starting engine with comfort
access 37
i menu 17
Imprint 2
Indicator/warning lamps
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 80
– airbags 87
– brake system 80
– DSC 13, 79
– Flat Tire Monitor 83
– high beams 13
– MDrive 13, 51
– M Dynamic Mode 13, 79
– parking lamps/low beams 13
– safety belt warning 46
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 84
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 198
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 81
– refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 83
Info menu 17
Information
– on another location 128
– on current position 128
– on destination location 128
"Information" for navigation
system 128
Information menu, refer to
imenu17
"Information on
destination" 129
Information service 190
"Info sources" 69
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 82
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 152
– refer to Power failure 218
– refer to Setting time and
date 74
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 43
"Input map" 127
Installation location
– CD changer 163
– drive for navigation DVD 120
– mobile phone 104
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 137
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 94
Instrument lighting 94
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Instrument panel, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 102
Interesting destination for
navigation 128
"Interim time" 73
Interior lamps 94
– switching on with remote
control 31
Interior motion sensor 35
– switching off 36
Interior rearview mirror 49
– automatic dimming
feature 49
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 62
J
Jacking points 216
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jump starting 220
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 29
"Keypad" 182
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
– spare key 28
Knock control 197
L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 91
Lamps and bulbs 210
"Language / Units" 75, 76
– for navigation
system 121, 137
"Languages" 76
– for navigation
system 121, 137
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 116
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 129
"Last seat pos." 44
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 53
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 210
Length, refer to
Dimensions 227
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 213
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 210
Lighter 106
"Lighting" 62
Lighting
– instruments 94
– lamps and bulbs 210
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 91
ba8_m5us.book Seite 242 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Light switch 91
"Limit" 73
Loading
– securing cargo 116
– stowing cargo 115
– vehicle 114
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 116
"Lock after driving" 33
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking 31
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 33
– from outside 31
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Low beams 91
– automatic 91
– indicator lamp 13
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 42
Lug bolts 216
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 217
– wrench 216
Luggage compartment lid 33
– emergency release 34
– locking with remote
control 31
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
– unlocking and locking from
inside 32
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate, comfort access 37
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 116
Lumbar support 42
LW, waveband 150
M
M Dynamic Mode MDM 79
– indicator lamp 13, 79
M Engine Dynamic Control 58
– "P 400" 58
– "P 500" 58
– "P 500 Sport" 58
M Mobility System 213
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 202
Maintenance 208
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 208
– refer to Service
requirements 68
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 208
Maintenance system 208
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 70
Manual air distribution 97
"Manual" on the radio 151
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 196
– glass sunroof 39
– luggage compartment lid 34
Manual transmission 57
– tow-starting 223
"Map direction of travel" 136
Map display 136
"Map facing north" 136
Map for navigation
– changing scale 136
– destination entry 127
Map view facing north 136
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 98
Maximum speed with winter
tires 202
MDM, refer to M Dynamic
Mode 79
MDrive 50
"M Dynamic Mode" 79
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 227
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 43
MENU, button refer to Start
menu 17
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list for traffic
information 139
Microfilter 99
Microphone
– for telephone 14
– for voice command
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 49
Mirrors 48
– automatic curb monitor 48
– folding in and out 48
– heating 48
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 43
"Missed calls" 180
Missed calls 181
Mobile communications
devices in vehicle 113
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 181
– adjusting volume 178
– calling 179
– ending call 179
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 104
– missed calls 181
– operation by voice 183
– operation via iDrive 178
– redialing 181
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– Top 8 181
– touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 182
Mobile phone battery 186
ba8_m5us.book Seite 243 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
244
Mobility System 213
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 81
"Monitor on / off" 50
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 181
MP3
– compressed audio files 159
– USB/audio interface 166
Multi-function steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 61
– refer to Wiper system 62
Music tracks
– finding 161
– random play sequence 162
– sampling, scan 161
"Mute on / off" 50
"M View" 88
M view 89
MW, waveband 150
N
"Navigation" 67, 122
Navigation destination
– entering manually 122
– home address 132
– selecting via map 127
Navigation drive, installation
location 120
Navigation DVD 120
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 137
Navigation system 120
– address book 130
– bypassing route
sections 138
– destination entry 122
– destination guidance in
assistance window 120
– destination list 129
– displaying current
position 142
– displaying route 135
– entering a destination
manually 122
– entering destination via
voice 125
– last destinations 129
– navigation DVD 120
– route list 137
– searching for a special
destination 128
– selecting destination using
information 128
– selecting destination via
map 127
– selecting route criteria 132
– starting destination
guidance 134
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 134
– voice instructions 137
– volume adjustment 138
"Navigation voice
instructions" 50, 121, 137
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 44
"New address" for navigation
system 130
"New destination" 122, 127
New remote control 28
"New route" 138
New wheels and tires 201
"Next entertainment
source" 50
"Normal" with EDC 81
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles
63
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 221
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnostics
interface 209
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 197
Odometer 65
Oil, refer to Engine oil 204
Oil change intervals, refer to
Service requirements 68
Oil temperature 66
"On a new destination" for
navigation system 128
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
"Onboard info" 67
Onboard toolkit 210
"On destination" 128
"On location" 128
Opening and closing
– comfort access 36
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– using remote control 30
– using the door lock 32
Operating principle, iDrive 17
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 183
– adjusting volume 184
– canceling 183
– commands 183
– correcting phone
number 184
– dialing phone number 184
– placing a call 184
– redialing 185
– voice phone book 184
"Options" 191
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 226
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 98
ba8_m5us.book Seite 244 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Outside temperature
display 66
– changing unit of measure 75
– in computer 75
Overview
– operating principle 17
– radio control 146
– screen display 20
P
"P 400" 58
"P 500" 58
"P 500 Sport" 58
Panic mode 31
Park Distance Control PDC 77
"Parked car operation" 100
"Parked car ventilation" 100
Parked car ventilation 99
– activating activation
time 100
– preselecting activation
times 100
– switching on and off
directly 100
Parked car ventilation system,
LED 95
Parking, vehicle 56
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 77
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 77
Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 57
Parking lamps 91
– indicator lamp 13
Parking lamps/low beams,
indicator lamp 13
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 48
"Pathway lighting" 92
Pathway lighting 92
"PDC" 78
"PDC display on" 78
PDC Park Distance Control 77
Personal Profile 29
"Perspective" 136
"Phone" 174, 176, 179
Phone book 178
– changing entry 180
– creating and editing voice
phone book 184
– deleting all entries 181
– deleting entry 181
– dialing phone number 180
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 181
– dialing 179
– most recent numbers 181
– selecting in phone book 181
– Top 8 181
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 39
– power windows 38
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 220
Plastic, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
"Play" on the radio 158
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 99
Position
– displaying 142
– storing 130
"POWER" 51
POWER, refer to M Engine
Dynamic Control 58
Power failure 218
Power windows, refer to
Windows 37
Preselecting activation times
of the parked car
ventilation 100
"Presets" on the
radio 150, 157
Pressure, tires 198
– producing with M Mobility
System 213
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 83
"Profile" 193
Programmable button on
steering wheel 49
Programmable memory
buttons 21
Programming button function,
refer to Programmable
button on steering wheel 49
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 39
– windows 38
R
Radio
– autostore 152
– controls 146
– High Definition Radio 154
– sampling stations 151
– satellite radio 156
– selecting frequency
manually 151
– selecting
waveband 146, 150
– station search 151
– station selection 150
– station with the best
reception 152
– storing stations 152
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 147
– volume 147
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 154
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 55
Radio readiness 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
– with comfort access 37
Radio stations, storing 152
ba8_m5us.book Seite 245 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
246
Rain sensor 62
"Random", random play
sequence 162
"Random all" in audio
mode 163
"Random directory" in audio
mode 163
"RDS" 153
Reading lamps 94
Rear armrest, refer to Center
armrest, rear 107
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 212
– replacing bulbs 212
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 45
– folding over backrest 108
– heating 47
– removing head restraints 45
Rear socket 107
Rear ventilation 99
Rearview mirror 48
Rear window
– heating 97
– roller sun blind, refer to Sun
blinds 103
Rear window safety switch 38
"Received calls" 180
Reception
– quality 153
– radio stations 153
– regional station 152
Reception level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Rechargeable flashlight 104
Recirculated-air mode 98
– air recirculation 98
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 98
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 42
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 73
"Redial" for mobile phone 180
Redialing with mobile
phone 185
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 212
Refueling 196
Releasing, hood 203
Releasing the locks, refer to
Unlocking 36
"Relock door if not
opened" 33
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 67
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 67
Remote control 28
– comfort access
36
– garage door opener 102
– luggage compartment lid 31
– malfunction 31, 37
– replacing battery 37
Removing condensation on
the windows 97
"Repeat directory" in audio
mode 162
"Repeat" in audio mode 162
"Repeat track" in audio
mode 162
Replacement fuses 218
Replacement of tires, refer to
Changing wheels 215
Replacement remote control,
refer to New remote
controls 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 210
Replacing tires 201
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 201
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 66
"Reset" 82, 84
– stopwatch 73
– tone settings 149
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 149
"resetting FTM …" 83
"Reset to default" with
MDrive 51
Residual heat 98
Restraint systems
– for children 52
– refer to Safety belts 45
Retreaded tires 201
Reverse, fast
– CD changer 163
– CD player 163
Reverse gear 59
– manual transmission 57
Road map 136
"Roadside
Assistance" 182, 188
Roadside Assistance 220
Roadside parking lamps 93
Roof load capacity 228
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 116
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 221
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 132
– bypassing sections 138
– changing 138
– changing criteria 132
– displaying 135
– displaying arrow display 135
– displaying map view 136
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 137
– selecting 132
Route information, refer to
Destination guidance with
voice instructions 137
Route map, refer to Displaying
map view 136
"Route preference",
changing 132
Route selection 132
Rubber parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
ba8_m5us.book Seite 246 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
S
Safety 5
Safety belts 45
– damage 46
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– sitting safely 41
– warning lamp 46
Safety belt tensioners
– refer to Airbags 86
– refer to Safety belts 45
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 78
– airbags 86
– driving stability control
systems 78
– safety belts 45
Satellite radio 156
– enabling channel 156
– selecting channel 157
– storing channel 157
"SAT" with radio 146, 156
"Save current
destination" 132
"Scan"
– music tracks on CD 161
– stations with radio 151
Scan
– CD changer 161
– CD player 161
– radio 151
"Scan all" in audio mode 161
"Scan directory" in audio
mode 161
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 221
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 156
"Seat heater distribution" 47
Seats 42
– active backrest width
adjustment 43
– adjusting backrest width 42
– adjusting height 42
– adjusting shoulder
support 42
– adjusting the seats 42
– adjusting thigh support 42
– easy entry/exit 43
– heating 46
– lumbar support 42
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 43
– shoulder support 42
– sitting safely 41
– storing the setting 43
– ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation 47
Securing load
– refer to Securing cargo 116
– with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 109
"Select as
destination" 128, 191
"Select current speed" 73
Selecting audio sources, refer
to Operation via iDrive 146
Selecting frequency
manually 151
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting route 132
Selection options with
navigation system 132
Selector lever, Sequential
Manual Transmission 59
Selector lever positions,
Sequential Manual
Transmission 59
Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
– Drivelogic driving
programs 60
– idle 59
– initializing system, refer to
After changing wheels/
tires 202
– reverse gear 59
– Sequential mode 59
– shift lights 61
– shiftlock 59
– towing 222
– tow-starting 223
Sequential mode 59
"Service" 69, 189
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 220
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 208
Service Interval Display
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 208
– refer to Service
requirements 68
"Service notification" 189
"Service Request" 182, 189
"Service
requirements" 69, 189
Service requirements 68
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 208
"Service Status" 193
"Set"
– in audio mode 146
– on trip computer 68
"Set date" 75
"Set service date" 70
"Set time" 74
Setting button, refer to
Controls, controller 16
"Settings" 193
– for BMW Assist 191
– for MDrive 51
– for unlocking 30
ba8_m5us.book Seite 247 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
248
Settings
– changing on Control
Display 73
– clock, 12h/24h mode 74
– configuring, refer to
MDrive 50
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 29
– date 75
– language 76
– units of measure 75
Settings menu, refer to
imenu17
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
times 100
Shifting 60
Shift lights 61
Shiftlock 59
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 60
Shock absorber control, refer
to EDC Electronic Damping
Control 81
Short commands of voice
command system 229
"Short route" for
navigation 132
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 132
Shoulder support 42
"Show current position" 127
"Show destination
position" 127
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 162
– CD player 162
Side airbags 86
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 212
Side-mounted turn signals,
replacing bulbs 212
Side window blinds, refer to
Sun blinds 103
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 41
– with airbags 41
– with head restraint 41
– with safety belts 41
Ski bag 108
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass sunroof, electric 38
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting off on slopes 113
SMG, refer to Sequential
Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
"SMG Drivelogic" 51, 61
Snap-in adapter
– mounting/removing 185
– using 172
Snow chains
202
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 209
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 55
Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 107
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 33
Song search on CD, refer to
Sampling tracks 161
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency call 219
Spare
– adapter for spare key 28
– fuses 218
– key 28
Spare wheel
– driving with spare wheel 217
– refer to Changing
wheels 215
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 206
Speed-dependent
volume 148
Speed limit 72
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 72
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", tone
control 148
Speed with winter tires 202
"Sport" with EDC 81
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 78
Start/Stop button 55
– starting the engine 56
– switching off the engine 56
"Start" for stopwatch 73
"Start guidance" 125, 134
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 56
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 220
Starting assistant, refer to
Starting off on slopes 113
Starting difficulties, jump
starting 220
Starting off
– on a slippery surface 113
– on slopes 113
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start route guidance" 127
"Start service" 188
"Start Service" for BMW
Assist 190
"State / Province" for
destination entry 123
"State inspection" 70
Station, refer to Radio 150
"Status" 69
Status information on Control
Display 20
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel
– adjustment 49
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 43
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– easy entry/exit 49
– heating 49
– lock, refer to Ignition lock 55
– MDrive button 50
– memory 43
– programmable button 49
– shift paddles 60
"Steering wheel button" 50
ba8_m5us.book Seite 248 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Steering-wheel shift buttons,
refer to Shift paddles 60
"Stop" for stopwatch 73
"Stopwatch" 73
Stopwatch 73
Storage compartments 105
"Store in address book" for
navigation system 130
"Store" on the radio 152, 158
Storing current position 130
Storing radio stations 152
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 43
Storing tires 202
"Street" for destination
entry 124
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 198
Sun blinds 103
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 148, 149
SW, waveband 150
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off engine 56
Switching on
– audio 146
– CD changer 146
– CD player 146
– radio 146
Switching on hour signal 74
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 93
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13
– navigation system 141
– status information 20
– traffic information with
navigation system 138
T
Tachometer 65
Tail lamps 212
– replacing bulbs 212
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 228
Target cursor for
navigation 127
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 226
– capacities 228
– dimensions 227
Telematics, refer to
BMW Assist 187
Telephone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 104
– refer to Mobile phone 172
"Telephone list" 50
TeleService 189
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 96
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 96
– changing units of
measure 75
– refer to Coolant
temperature 65
Temperature display
– changing units of
measure 75
– outside temperature 65
– outside temperature
warning 66
Temperature gauge, engine
oil 66
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 63
"Terminate services" 192
"Text language" 76
"Theater", refer to Tone
control 149
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 212
Through-loading system 108
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 217
Tilt alarm sensor 35
– switching off 36
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 48
"Time" 74
"Time format" 74
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 100
"Timer 1" for parked-car
ventilation 100
"Timer 2" for parked-car
ventilation 100
Tire inflation pressures 198
Tire pressure
– loss 83
Tire pressure loss 83
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 83
Tire Quality Grading 199
Tire replacement, new wheels
and tires 201
Tires
– age 199
– air loss 83, 84
– breaking-in 112
– changing 201
– condition 200
– damage 201
– flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 215
– inflation pressure 198
– M Mobility System 213
– new wheels and tires 201
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 81
– pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 83
– replacing 215
– retreaded tires 201
– size 199
– tread 200
– wear indicators 200
– wheel/tire combination 201
– winter tires 202
Tire trouble, changing
wheels 215
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 138
"Tone" 147
Tone dialing method 182
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 147
– middle setting 149
Tone on locking/unlocking 31
ba8_m5us.book Seite 249 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
250
Tools, refer to Onboard
toolkit 210
"Top 8" for mobile phone 180
Torque
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 217
– refer to Engine data 226
Touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 182
Tow bar 222
Tow fitting 221
Towing 221
– methods 222
– tow fittings 221
– with manual
transmission 222
– with Sequential Manual
Transmission 222
– with Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 222
"Town / City" for destination
entry 123
Tow rope 222
Tow-starting 221
"TPM" 84
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 83
– resetting system 84
– system limits 83
– warning lamp 84
Tracks
– random sequence 162
– sampling on CD 161
– selecting with CD 160
Track width, refer to
Dimensions 227
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 79
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 138
– refer to Bypassing route
sections 138
Traffic information for
navigation
– depiction in route map 140
– displaying 139
– during destination
guidance 141
– symbols 141
Traffic information with
navigation 138
"Traffic Info settings" 139
Transmission
– breaking-in 112
– Drivelogic 60
– idle 59
– manual transmission 57
– reverse gear 59
– Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 58
– shift lights 61
– starting assistant, refer to
Starting off on slopes 113
– towing 222
– tow-starting 222
Transporting children
safely 52
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 116
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 200
Treble, refer to Tone
control 147
"Treble", tone control 148
"Trip computer" 68
Trip computer 68
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 65
"Triple turn signal" 62
Trip odometer 65
Trunk, refer to Cargo bay
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 227
Turning lamps 93
– replacing bulbs 211
Turn signals 61
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 212
U
"Unchanged" 51, 61
Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 199
"Units" 75
Units
– average fuel
consumption 75
– temperature 75
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 102
Universal remote control 102
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36
"Update services" 191
Upshift display, refer to Shift
lights 61
USB/audio interface 166
"USB" in audio
mode 165, 167
"Use current location as
address" 130, 132
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 218
– refer to Replacing battery 37
Using turn signals 62
ba8_m5us.book Seite 250 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
V
Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 217
Vehicle
– battery 218
– breaking-in 112
– care 209
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– loading 114
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 227
– parking 56
– washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– weights 228
"Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30
Vehicle jack 216
– jacking points 216
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 142
Ventilation 99
– draft-free 99
– in rear 99
– while stationary 99
Venting, refer to Ventilation 99
Vent outlets 95
– automatic climate control 95
– refer to Ventilation 99
"Vent settings" 97
Viscosity 206
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 137
Voice command system
– overview 23
– short commands 229
Voice instructions for
navigation system 137
– muting 50
– repeating 50, 138
– switching on/off 50, 137
– volume 138
Voice phone book 184
Volume 146
– audio sources 146
– cargo bay 228
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 228
– mobile phone 178
– setting speed-
dependent 148
– voice instructions 138
– windshield cleaning system,
refer to Capacities 228
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 70
Warning triangle 219
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 208
Washer fluid 63
– capacity of the reservoir 63
Washing the vehicle, also refer
to Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Waste container, refer to
Ashtray 106
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 113
Waveband for radio 150
"WB" 146, 154
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 200
Weather news flashes 154
Website BMW 4
Weights 228
Welcome lamps 91
"Welcome light" 92
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 201
Wheel/tire damage 201
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 227
Wheels and tires 198
Width, refer to
Dimensions 227
Windows 37
– comfort operation 31
– comfort operation from
outside 32
– comfort operation with
comfort access 36
– safety switch 38
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 62
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 97
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 88
Windshield wash
– automatic, refer to Rain
sensor 62
– capacities, reservoir 228
– filler neck for washer
fluid 204
– washer fluid 63
– windshield washer
nozzles 63
– wiper system 62
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 62
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– wiper blade
replacement 210
Winter tires 202
– setting speed limit 72
– storage 202
Wiper blades
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– replacement 210
Wiper system 62
– rain sensor 62
– washer fluid 63
– windshield washer
nozzles 63
"With highways" for
navigation system 132
Wood decoration, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Word matching principle for
navigation 133
ba8_m5us.book Seite 251 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
252
Working in the engine
compartment 203
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard toolkit 210
X
Xenon lamps 211
– replacing bulbs 211
Y
Your individual vehicle
– programmable button on
steering wheel 49
– settings, refer to MDrive 50
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 29
ba8_m5us.book Seite 252 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
ba8_m5us.book Seite 253 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
01 41 0 013 310 ue
*BL001331000Y*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
ba8_m5us.book Seite 254 Montag, 5. Februar 2007 12:03 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 310 - © 02/07 BMW AG
